HP Hewlett Packard Copier 4100N User Manual
hp LaserJet 4100  
user guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HP LaserJet 4100, 4100N,  
4100TN, and 4100DTN Printers  
User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard  
Company 2002  
Trademark Credits  
Adobe and PostScript are  
trademarks of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated which may be  
registered in certain  
All Rights Reserved.  
Except as allowed by copyright  
laws or herein, reproduction,  
adaptation, or translation  
without prior written  
jurisdictions.  
Arial and Times New Roman  
areU.S. registeredtrademarks  
of the Monotype Corporation.  
permission is prohibited.  
A user of the Hewlett-Packard  
printer associated with this  
user guide is granted a license  
to (a) print hard copies of this  
user guide for personal,  
internal, or company use  
subject to the restriction not to  
sell, re-sell or otherwise  
distribute the hard copies; and  
(b) place an electronic copy of  
this user guide on a network  
server provided access to the  
electronic copy is limited to  
personal, internal users of the  
Hewlett-Packard printer  
AutoCAD is a U.S. trademark  
of Autodesk, Inc.  
ENERGY STAR is a U.S.  
registered service mark of the  
U.S. EPA.  
HP-UX Release 10.20 and  
later and HP-UX Release  
11.00 and later on all HP 9000  
computers are Open Group  
UNIX products.  
Microsoft and MS-DOS are  
registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
associated with this user  
guide.  
TrueTypeisaU.S.trademarkof  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
The information contained in  
this document is subject to  
change without notice.  
UNIXisaregisteredtrademark  
of the Open Group.  
Fourth Edition, May 2003  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
11311 Chinden Boulevard  
Boise, Idaho 83714 USA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
About this guide 9  
How to use this online user guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Navigational features in this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Features of Acrobat Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Where to look for more information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Setting up the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Using the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
1 Printer basics  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Printer features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Printer configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Printer parts and locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Accessories and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Items and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Ordering through service or support providers . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Ordering directly through the embedded web server . . . . . . .22  
Ordering directly through the printer software. . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Control panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Control panel lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Control panel keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Using the printer online help system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Control panel menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Printer software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Software provided. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Software for Windows-based computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Software for Macintosh computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Software for networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
EN  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 Printing tasks  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Selecting the output bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Printing to the top output bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Printing to the rear output bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Loading tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Loading trays 2, 3, and 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Printing both sides of paper (optional duplexer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Guidelines for printing both sides of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Placement for paper requiring a specific orientation. . . . . . . .51  
Layout options for printing both sides of paper. . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Printing special paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Printing small or narrow paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Printing letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper (single-  
sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Printing envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Printing labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Printing transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Printing cards, custom-size, and heavy paper . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Advanced printing tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Using features in the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Customizing what tray is used for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Job retention features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Quick copying a job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Proofing and holding a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Printing a private job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Storing a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Printing a stored job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Deleting a stored job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Printing with the optional HP Fast InfraRed Receiver . . . . . . . . . .80  
Setting up to print with Windows 9x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Setting up to print with Macintosh computers . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Printing a job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Interrupting and resuming printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
3 Printer maintenance  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Managing the toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
HP toner cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Non-HP toner cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Toner cartridge authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Toner cartridge storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Toner cartridge life expectancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Checking the toner level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Cartridge interaction (shaking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Toner low and toner out conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
4 Contents  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
General guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Cleaning procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Cleaning the fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
Running the cleaning page manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
Running the cleaning page automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Performing preventative maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Configuring alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
4 Problem solving  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Paper jam locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Clearing jams from the top cover and toner cartridge areas. .98  
Clearing jams from the optional envelope feeder . . . . . . . . .100  
Clearing jams from the input tray areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Clearing jams from the optional duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Clearing jams from the output areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Clearing jams from the fuser area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Solving repeated paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Understanding printer messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Mopy disk error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Correcting output quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Light print (partial page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Light print (entire page). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Specks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
Gray background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Toner smear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Loose toner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Repeating defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Repeating image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Misformed characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Page skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Curl or wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Wrinkles or creases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Vertical white lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Tire tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
White spots on black. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
Determining printer problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137  
Troubleshooting flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137  
Troubleshooting flowchart for Macintosh users . . . . . . . . . .143  
Troubleshooting the optional printer hard disk accessory. . . . . .146  
Troubleshooting PS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147  
Troubleshooting optional HP Fast InfraRed Receiver problems .148  
EN  
Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communicating with an optional HP JetDirect print server . . . . .150  
Checking the printer configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Menu map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152  
Supplies status page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
PCL or PS font list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156  
5 Service and support  
HP Customer Care Service and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157  
Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157  
HP fraud hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
Customer support options worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162  
HP Customer Care Center and product repair assistance for the  
U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162  
European HP Customer Care Center language and in-country  
options available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163  
In-country/region support numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
Warranty information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
Guidelines for repacking the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
Service information form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167  
Limited warranty for toner cartridge life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169  
HP software license terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices . . . . . . . . . .172  
Appendix A Specifications  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187  
Paper specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188  
Supported sizes and weights of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189  
Supported types of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192  
Guidelines for using paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192  
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196  
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196  
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
Card stock and heavy paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198  
Printer specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200  
Physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200  
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Product compatibility matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
6 Contents  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B Control panel menus  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
Control panel menu map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
Quick Copy Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206  
Private/Stored Jobs Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210  
Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213  
Print Quality Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217  
Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219  
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222  
Resets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
EIO Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
Appendix C Printer memory and expansion  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229  
Installing memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230  
Checking memory installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Saving resources (permanent resources) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Installing EIO cards/mass storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233  
Appendix D Printer commands  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Understanding PCL 5e printer command syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . .236  
Combining escape sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237  
Entering escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237  
Selecting PCL 5e fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238  
Common PCL 5e printer commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239  
Appendix E Regulatory information  
FCC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243  
Environmental product stewardship program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244  
Protecting the environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244  
Material safety data sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246  
Safety statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248  
Laser safety statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248  
Canadian DOC regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248  
EMI statement (Korea) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248  
VCCI statement (Japan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248  
Laser statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249  
EN  
Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix F Embedded web server  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251  
Accessing the embedded web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
Embedded web server pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
Home pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
Device pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
Network pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254  
Index  
8 Contents  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About this guide  
How to use this online user guide  
This user guide is provided in an Adobe™ Acrobat portable  
document format (PDF file). This section will help familiarize you  
with using PDF documents.  
Navigational features in this guide  
Click the Table of Contents icon to go to the table of  
contents for the online user guide. The entries are  
linked to their related locations in the user guide.  
Click the Introduction icon to return to this section for  
tips on using this online user guide.  
Click the Index icon to go to the index for the online  
user guide. The index entries are linked to their related  
topics.  
Click the Up Arrow icon to go to the previous page.  
Click the Down Arrow icon to go to the next page.  
EN  
How to use this online user guide 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Features of Acrobat Reader  
Finding information in PDF documents  
To find specific information in a PDF document, click Contents or  
Index in the upper-left corner of the Acrobat Reader window, and  
then click the topic you want.  
Viewing PDF documents  
For complete instructions on how to view PDF documents, see the  
online help included with Acrobat Reader.  
Magnifying the Page View  
You can use the zoom-in tool, the magnification box in the status bar,  
or the toolbar buttons to change the screen magnification. When you  
zoom in on a document, you can use the hand tool to move the page  
around.  
Acrobat Reader also offers magnification level choices that control  
how the page fits on-screen:  
Fit Page scales the page to fit within the main window.  
Fit Width scales the page to fit the width of the main window.  
Fit Visible fills the window with the page’s content area only.  
To increase magnification: Select the zoom-in tool and click on  
the document page to double the current magnification.  
To decrease magnification: Select the zoom-in tool while holding  
down Ctrl (Windows and UNIX®) or Option (Macintosh), and click  
the center of the area you want to reduce.  
10 About this guide  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Paging through a document  
The following options are available for paging through a document.  
To go to the next page: Click the Next Page button in the toolbar, or  
press the Right Arrow or Down Arrow.  
To return to the previous page: Click the Previous Page button in  
the toolbar, or press the Left Arrow or Up Arrow.  
To go to the first page: Click the First Page button in the toolbar.  
To go to the last page: Click the Last Page button in the toolbar.  
To jump to a specific numbered page: Click the page number box  
in the status bar at the bottom of the main window, type the page  
number, and click OK.  
Browsing with thumbnails  
A thumbnail is a miniature view of each document page. You can  
display thumbnails in the overview area. Use a thumbnail to jump  
quickly to a page and to adjust the view of the current page.  
Click on a thumbnail to move to the page it represents.  
Finding words  
Use the Find command to find part of a word, a complete word, or  
multiple words in the active document.  
Click on the Find button, or choose Find from the Tools menu.  
Printing the document  
To print selected pages: From the File menu, choose Print. Choose  
Pages. In the From and To boxes type the range of pages you wish to  
print. Then click OK.  
EN  
How to use this online user guide 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
To print the whole document: From the File menu, choose Print.  
Choose All n pages (n represents the total number of pages in the  
document), then click OK.  
Note  
Go to http://www.adobe.com/ for the latest versions and additional  
languages of Adobe™ Acrobat Reader.  
12 About this guide  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Where to look for more information  
Several references are available for use with this printer. Additional  
information is available at http://www.hp.com/support/lj4100.  
Setting up the printer  
Getting Started Guide  
Information for setting up your printer  
(Getting Started), as well as tips and  
quick information for using the printer  
(Quick Reference). For additional  
copies, contact HP DIRECT at (800)  
538-8787 (U.S.) or contact your  
HP-authorized dealer.  
HP JetDirect Print Server  
Administrator’s Guide  
Information for configuring and  
troubleshooting the HP JetDirect  
print server, available on the CD that  
came with the printer.  
EN  
Where to look for more information 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using the printer  
Getting Started Guide  
Information for setting up your printer  
(Getting Started), as well as tips and  
quick information for using the printer  
(Quick Reference). For additional  
copies, contact HP DIRECT at (800)  
538-8787 (U.S.) or contact your  
HP-authorized dealer.  
Online Help  
Information on printer options that are  
available from within printer drivers. To  
view a help file, access the online help  
through the printer driver.  
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver  
User Guide  
Information on using and  
troubleshooting the HP Fast InfraRed  
Receiver.  
Accessory guides  
Instructions for installing and using  
accessories or toner cartridges,  
included with the accessory.  
14 About this guide  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                       
Printer basics  
1
Overview  
Congratulations on your purchase of an HP LaserJet 4100 series  
printer. If you have not done so, see the getting started guide  
provided with the printer for setup instructions.  
Now that the printer is set up and ready to use, take a few moments to  
get to know the printer. This chapter introduces the following:  
G
G
G
G
G
features and benefits of the printer  
important printer parts and locations  
accessories and supplies available for the printer  
the layout and basic operation of the printer control panel  
helpful printer software for increased printing flexibility  
EN  
Overview 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printer features and benefits  
Speed and throughput  
G
instant-on fuser prints the first page in 12 seconds  
G
prints letter-size paper at 25 pages per minute (ppm) or A4-size  
paper at 24 ppm  
G
“RIP ONCE” capability with 32 MB or hard disk options  
Resolution  
G
G
G
FastRes 1200—produces 1200-dpi print quality for fast, high-  
quality printing of business text and graphics  
ProRes 1200—produces 1200-dpi printing for best quality of  
graphic images  
HP UltraPrecise toner for crisp, sharp output  
Paper handling  
G
G
G
HP LaserJet 4100 and 4100N: hold 600 sheets of paper  
HP LaserJet 4100TN and 4100DTN: hold 1100 sheets of paper  
expandable to hold up to 1600 sheets of paper with optional  
accessories  
G
prints a wide range of sizes, types, and weights  
Language and fonts  
G
G
HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PostScript Level 2 emulation  
80 fonts for Microsoft® Windows  
Toner cartridge  
G
supplies status page with toner gauge, page count, and  
information on paper sizes used  
G
G
no-shake cartridge design  
check for authentic HP toner cartridges  
16 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Expandable design  
G
optional paper handling accessories:  
• stackable 500-sheet paper trays (up to two additional trays)  
• power envelope feeder (holds up to 75 envelopes)  
• duplex printing accessory (for two-sided printing)  
flash storage (for forms, fonts, and signatures)  
expandable memory (up to 256 MB)  
G
G
G
G
G
two EIO slots for connecting to networks or additional devices  
HP JetSend enabled  
hard disk (for job retention)  
EN  
Printer features and benefits 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer configurations  
This printer is available in four configurations:  
HP LaserJet 4100  
G
G
G
16 MB RAM  
100-sheet paper tray  
500-sheet paper tray  
HP LaserJet 4100N  
G
G
32 MB RAM  
HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server card for network  
connection  
G
G
100-sheet paper tray  
500-sheet paper tray  
HP LaserJet 4100TN  
G
G
32 MB RAM  
HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server card for network  
connection  
G
G
100-sheet paper tray  
two 500-sheet paper trays  
HP LaserJet 4100DTN  
G
G
32 MB RAM  
HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server card for network  
connection  
G
G
G
100-sheet paper tray  
two 500-sheet paper trays  
duplex printing accessory (duplexer)  
18 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printer parts and locations  
Printer parts (front view, HP LaserJet 4100/4100N printer)  
Top output bin  
Control panel  
Top cover (toner  
Additional  
cartridge underneath)  
memory can be  
installed here  
Power switch  
Tray 1 (100-sheet)  
Tray numbers  
1
Paper level  
indicator  
2
Tray 2 (500-sheet)  
EN  
Printer parts and locations 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printer parts (back view)  
11  
10  
1
9
8
2
3
7
4
6
5
1
Fuser (can be removed to clear paper jams)  
Rear output bin (straight-through paper path)  
Power connector  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Dust cover (tray 2 dust cover not installed if duplexer is installed)  
Parallel interface port  
Enhanced I/O (EIO) slots  
Fast InfraRed (FIR) port for an optional FIR receiver  
Memory access door (more than one DIMM can be installed)  
Accessory interface port  
10 Serial and model numbers (under top cover)  
11 Toner cartridge access (under top cover)  
20 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessories and supplies  
You can increase the capabilities of the printer with optional  
accessories and supplies, as shown below. See “Ordering  
information” on page 22.  
Note  
Use accessories and supplies specifically designed for the printer to  
ensure optimum performance.  
The printer supports two enhanced input/output (EIO) cards. One of  
the card slots is already used in the HP LaserJet 4100N/4100TN/  
4100DTN for the HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server card.  
3
1
2
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
HP JetDirect print server (EIO card)  
Hard disk accessory (EIO card)  
Memory DIMM, flash DIMM, or font DIMM  
Duplex printing accessory (duplexer), for 2-sided printing  
Stackable 500-sheet paper tray (maximum of two, as shown here,  
for a total input capacity of 1,600 sheets)  
Envelope feeder  
6
EN  
Accessories and supplies 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Ordering information  
Items and part numbers  
Use only parts and accessories specifically designed for this printer.  
See the table ahead, which is organized according to type of  
accessory:  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
paper handling  
memory, fonts, and mass storage  
hardware  
cables and interfaces  
documentation  
maintenance  
printing supplies  
See “Product compatibility matrix” on page 203 for information on the  
compatibility of accessories for the HP LaserJet 4000, 4050, and  
4100 Series printers.  
Ordering through service or support  
providers  
To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or  
support provider (see “HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies”  
on page 160, “HP direct ordering for genuine HP parts” on page 160,  
or “HP authorized resellers and support” on page 160).  
Ordering directly through the embedded web  
server  
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the  
embedded web server (see “Accessing the embedded web server” on  
page 252 for an explanation of this feature).  
1
In your web browser, enter the IP address for the printer home  
page. This takes you to the printer status page.  
2
3
Click the Device tab at the top of the screen.  
If asked to provide a password, enter the password.  
22 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4
5
On the left side of the Device Configuration page, double-click  
Order Supplies. This provides a URL from which to purchase  
consumables. Supplies information with part numbers and printer  
information is provided.  
Select the part numbers you wish to order and follow the  
instructions on the screen.  
Ordering directly through the printer software  
The printer software gives you the ability to order parts and  
accessories directly from your computer. Three things are required to  
use this feature:  
G
the “Supplies Information and Ordering” software must be  
installed on your computer (use the custom installation option to  
install this software)  
G
G
the printer must be directly connected to your computer (parallel)  
you must have access to the World Wide Web  
1
2
3
4
5
At the bottom right of your screen (in the system tray), click the  
Printer icon. This opens the status window.  
On the left side of the status window, click the Printer icon from  
which you wish to obtain status.  
At the top of the status window, click Supplies link. You can also  
scroll down to Supplies Status.  
Click Order Supplies. This opens a browser that produces a  
URL from which to purchase consumables.  
Select the supplies you wish to order.  
EN  
Ordering information 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper handling  
Item  
Part number  
Description or use  
500-sheet feeder and paper  
tray  
C8055A  
Stackable paper feeder and 500-sheet  
paper tray.  
Envelope feeder  
C8053A  
C8054A  
Automatically feeds up to 75 envelopes.  
Duplex printing accessory  
(duplexer)  
Allows automatic printing on both sides of  
paper.  
Replacement 500-sheet  
paper tray (without the  
feeder)  
C8056A  
Supports multiple paper sizes and custom  
sizes (see “Supported sizes and weights  
of paper - trays 2, 3, and 4” on page 190).  
Memory, fonts, and mass storage  
Item  
Part number  
Description or use  
SDRAM DIMM (Dual In-line  
Memory Module)  
Boosts the ability of the printer to handle  
large print jobs (maximum 256 MB with  
HP-brand DIMMs).  
4 MB  
8 MB  
16 MB  
32 MB  
64 MB  
128 MB  
C4140A  
C4141A  
C4142A  
C4143A  
C3913A  
C9121A  
Flash DIMM  
Permanent storage for fonts and forms.  
8-MB Asian MROM.  
2 MB  
4 MB  
C4286A  
C4287A  
Font DIMM  
Korean  
Simplified Chinese  
Traditional Chinese  
D4838A  
C4293A  
C4292A  
EIO hard disk  
C2985B  
Permanent storage for fonts and forms.  
Also used for making multiple original  
prints and Job Retention features.  
24 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware  
Item  
Part number  
Description or use  
FIR receiver  
C4103A  
Fast InfraRed Receiver.  
Cables and interfaces  
Item  
Part number  
Description or use  
Parallel cables  
2-meter IEEE-1284 cable  
3-meter IEEE-1284 cable  
C2950A  
C2951A  
Macintosh computer  
serial cable  
92215S  
For connecting to a Macintosh  
computer.  
Macintosh network  
cable kit  
92215N  
For connecting to PhoneNET or  
LocalTalk.  
Enhanced I/O (EIO) cards  
HP JetDirect EIO internal print  
server network cards.  
Token Ring networks  
Fast Ethernet (10/100Base-TX  
single RJ-45 port)  
J4167A  
J4169A  
HP JetDirect Connectivity card (EIO) J4135A  
for USB, Serial, LocalTalk  
EN  
Ordering information 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Documentation  
Item  
Part number Description or use  
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper  
Specification Guide  
5963-7863  
Aguidetousingpaperandotherprint  
media with HP LaserJet printers  
(English only).  
HP LaserJet 4100 Software and  
User Documentation CD-ROM  
An additional copy of the software  
and user documentation CD.  
Americas/Western Europe  
Europe  
Asia Pacific  
C8049-60104  
C8049-60105  
C8049-60106  
Getting Started Guide  
C8049-90903  
Printed copy of the getting started  
guide for the HP LaserJet 4100,  
4100N, 4100TN, and 4100DTN  
printers (English only).  
Maintenance  
Item  
Part number  
Description or use  
Printer maintenance kit  
User-replaceable parts and  
instructions for printer maintenance.  
110 V printer kit  
220 V printer kit  
C8057A  
C8058A  
26 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing supplies  
Item  
Part number  
Description or use  
Toner cartridges  
Replacement HP UltraPrecise toner  
cartridge.  
6,000 pages  
10,000 pages  
C8061A  
C8061X  
HP LaserJet Paper  
For use with HP Color LaserJet  
printers and HP LaserJet  
monochrome printers. Good for  
letterhead, high-value memos, legal  
documents, direct mail, and  
correspondence.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
HPJ1124  
HPJ200C  
HPJ113H  
HPJ1424  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 200 sheets/  
ream, 12-ream carton  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 3-hole, 500  
sheets/ream, 10-ream carton  
Specifications: 96 bright, 24 lb.  
Legal (8.5 by 14 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
A4 (216 by 279 mm), 500 sheets/ CHP310  
ream, 5-ream carton  
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss Paper  
For use with HP Color LaserJet  
printers and HP LaserJet  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 50 sheets/box C4179A  
monochrome printers. Coated paper,  
good for business documents with  
high impact, such as brochures,  
sales material, and documents with  
graphics and photographic images.  
A4 (216 by 279 mm), 50 sheets/  
box  
C4179B  
Specifications: 32 lb.  
HP LaserJet Transparency  
For use with HP LaserJet  
monochrome printers.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 50 sheets/box 92296T  
Specifications: 4.3 mil thickness.  
A4 (216 by 279 mm), 50 sheets/  
box  
92296U  
HP MultiPurpose Paper  
For use with all office equipment—  
laser and inkjet printers, copiers, and  
fax machines. Created for  
businesses that want one paper for  
all their office needs. Brighter and  
smoother than other office papers.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
HPM1120  
HPM115R  
HP25011  
HPM113H  
HPM1420  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 5-ream carton  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 250 sheets/  
ream, 12-ream carton  
Specifications: 90 bright, 20 lb.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 3-hole, 500  
sheets/ream, 10-ream carton  
Legal (8.5 by 14 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
EN  
Ordering information 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing supplies (continued)  
Item  
Part number  
Description or use  
HP Office Paper  
For use with all office equipment—-  
laser and inkjet printers, copiers, and  
fax machines. Good for high-volume  
printing.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
HPC8511  
HPC3HP  
HPC8514  
HP2500S  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 3-hole, 500  
sheets/ream, 10-ream carton  
Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb.  
Legal (8.5 by 14 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), Quick Pack,  
2,500-sheet carton  
A4 (216 by 279 mm), 500 sheets/ CHP110  
ream, 5-ream carton  
HP Office Recycled Paper  
For use with all office equipment—  
laser and inkjet printers, copiers, and  
fax machines. Good for high-volume  
printing.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
HPE1120  
HPE113H  
HPE1420  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 3-hole, 500  
sheets/ream, 10-ream carton  
Satisfies U.S. Executive Order 13101  
for environmentally preferable  
products.  
Legal (8.5 by 14 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb, 30%  
post-consumer content.  
HP Premium Choice LaserJet  
Paper  
For use with HP Color LaserJet  
printers, HP LaserJet monochrome  
printers, and color copiers. Good for  
hardcopy presentations, business  
reports and proposals, data sheets,  
price lists, and newsletters.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
HPU1132  
A4 (216 by 279 mm), 500 sheets/ CHP410  
ream, 4-ream carton  
Specifications: 98 bright, 32 lb.  
A4 (216 by 279 mm), 250 sheets/ CHP415  
ream, 8-ream carton  
HP Printing Paper  
For use with laser and inkjet printers.  
Created especially for small and  
home offices. Heavier and brighter  
than copier paper.  
Letter (8.5 by 11 in), 500 sheets/  
ream, 10-ream carton  
HPP1122  
A4 (216 by 279 mm), 500 sheets/ CHP210  
ream, 5-ream carton  
Specifications: 92 bright, 22 lb.  
28 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control panel layout  
Control panel  
The printer’s control panel consists of the following:  
READY  
Two-line  
display  
Go  
Menu  
Item  
Ready  
Data  
Printer  
online  
help  
–Value+  
Select  
Attention  
Cancel  
Job  
Control panel lights  
Light  
Ready  
Data  
Indication when lit  
The printer is ready to print.  
The printer is processing information.  
Attention  
Action is required. See the control panel display for an  
associated message.  
EN  
Control panel layout 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Control panel keys  
Key  
Function  
GO  
• Places the printer either online or offline.  
• Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer.  
• Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline. Clears most  
printer messages and places the printer online.  
• AllowstheprintertocontinueprintingwithanerrormessagesuchasTRAY  
x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE.  
• Confirms a manual feed request if tray 1 is loaded and TRAY 1  
MODE=CASSETTEhas been set from the Paper Handling Menu in the  
printer’s control panel.  
• Overrides a manual feed request from tray 1 by selecting paper from the  
next available tray.  
• Exits the control panel menus. (To save a selected control panel setting,  
first press SELECT.  
CANCEL JOB  
MENU  
Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. (Press CANCEL JOB only  
once.) The time it takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job.  
Cycles through the control panel menus. Press the right side of the key to  
move forward or the left side of the key to move backward.  
ITEM  
Cycles through the items in the selected menu. Press the right side of the  
key to move forward or the left side of the key to move backward.  
-VALUE+  
SELECT  
Cycles through the values in the selected menu item. Press + to move  
forward or - to move backward.  
• Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears next to the  
selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default settings remain  
when the printer is switched off or reset (unless you reset all factory  
defaults from the Resets Menu).  
• Prints one of the printer information pages from the control panel.  
30 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using the printer online help system  
This printer features an online help system on the control panel that  
provides instructions for resolving most printer errors. Certain control  
panel error messages alternate with instructions on accessing the  
online help system.  
Whenever a ?appears in an error message or a message alternates  
with FOR HELP PRESS THE ? KEY, press the right side of the ITEM key  
to navigate through a sequence of instructions.  
Note  
To exit the online help system, press GO or SELECT.  
EN  
Control panel layout 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Control panel menus  
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see  
"Control panel menus" on page 205.  
Press MENU for access to all control panel menus. When additional  
trays or other accessories are installed in the printer, new menus or  
menu items might automatically appear.  
To print a control panel menu map  
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the  
control panel, print a control panel menu map. You might want to store  
the menu map near the printer for reference.  
1
2
3
Press MENU repeatedly until INFORMATION MENUappears.  
Press ITEM repeatedly until PRINT MENU MAPappears.  
Press SELECT to print the menu map.  
Note  
Certain menu options appear only when the associated accessory is  
installed. For example, the EIO menu appears only if you have an EIO  
card installed.  
To change a control panel setting  
1
2
3
4
Press MENU repeatedly until the desired menu appears.  
Press ITEM repeatedly until the desired item appears.  
Press -VALUE+ repeatedly until the desired setting appears.  
Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next  
to the selection in the display, indicating that it is now the default.  
5
Press GO to exit the menu.  
Note  
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control  
panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver  
settings.)  
If you cannot access a menu or item, it is either not an option for the  
printer, or you have not enabled the associated higher level option. See  
your network administrator if this function has been locked (the control  
panel reads ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED).  
32 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Printer software  
Software provided  
The printer comes with printing software and other helpful software  
on a CD. If your computer does not have a CD drive but you have  
access to one, you can copy the software onto diskettes for  
installation into your computer. See the getting started guide for  
installation instructions.  
The printer drivers provided on the CD must be installed to take full  
advantage of printer features. The other software programs are  
recommended, but are not required for operation. See the  
ReadMe.wri file for more information.  
Note  
Check the ReadMe.txt file provided on the CD for late-breaking  
information.  
Windows software  
Windows  
client  
Drivers  
Network  
administrator—  
Windows software  
Drivers  
Network administrator—  
Macintosh software  
PPDs  
HP LaserJet Utility*  
Fonts*  
Macintosh  
client  
Macintosh software  
PPDs  
HP LaserJet Utility  
* Not supported for the languages of Czech, Korean, Japanese, Russian,  
Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, or Turkish.  
Note  
Network administrators: HP Resource Manager should be installed  
only on the network administrator computer. Load all other applicable  
software on the server and all client computers.  
EN  
Printer software 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Depending on the configuration of Windows-based computers, the  
installation program for the printer software automatically checks the  
computer for Internet access and can obtain the latest software. If you  
do not have access to the Internet, see "HP Customer Care Service  
and Support" on page 157 for information on obtaining the most  
recent software.  
Included with the printer is a CD containing the HP LaserJet Printing  
System. On the CD are software components and drivers for end  
users and network administrators. See the ReadMe.wri file for the  
most current information.  
The CD includes software designed for end users and network  
administrators operating in the following environments:  
G
G
G
G
G
Microsoft Windows 9x  
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0  
Microsoft Windows 2000  
Apple Mac OS, version 7.5 3 or greater  
AutoCAD™ drivers, versions12–15  
Additional drivers and documentation for Windows NT 3.51 are  
available on the Internet. Additional drivers, font installer, and  
documentation for Windows 3.1x are available on the CD that came  
with the printer.  
34 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer drivers  
Printer drivers access the printer features and allow the computer to  
communicate with the printer (via a printer language).  
Note  
Check the ReadMe.wri file provided on the CD for additional software  
included and supported languages.  
Certain printer features are available only from the PCL 6 drivers. See  
the printer software help for availability of features.  
The following printer drivers are included with the printer. The most  
recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com/support/lj4100.  
Depending on the configuration of Windows-based computers, the  
installation program for the printer software automatically checks the  
computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers.  
Operating system  
PCL 5e  
G
PCL 6  
G
PSa  
PPDs  
b
Windows 3.1x  
G
Windows 9x  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
Macintosh OS  
G
G
G
G
a. PostScript 2 emulation is referred to as PS throughout this user guide.  
b. Level 1 emulation only.  
You can obtain the following additional printer drivers by downloading  
them from the Internet, or by requesting them from an HP-authorized  
service or support provider. (See "HP Customer Care Service and  
Support" on page 157.)  
G
G
NT 3.51 PCL 5e, NT 3.51 PS (available for English only)  
UNIX and Linux Model Scripts  
OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.  
They are not available for the languages of Japanese, Korean,  
Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese.  
Note  
If the desired printer driver is not on the CD or is not listed here, check  
the software application’s installation disks or ReadMe files to see if  
they include support for the printer. If not, contact the software  
manufacturer or distributor and request a driver for the printer.  
EN  
Printer software 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Software for Windows-based computers  
Network administrators: If the printer is attached to a network  
through an HP JetDirect EIO card, the printer must be configured for  
that network before you can print. For Microsoft and Novell NetWare  
networks, you can use the printer installation software. For other  
options, refer to the HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide  
(included with printers that contain an HP JetDirect print server).  
Use the Customization Utility option to create a set of disks with the  
exact software you want the end users to use. This allows you to  
distribute drivers without distributing administration software to end  
users.  
Access the Windows printer driver  
To configure the driver, access it in one of the following ways:  
Temporarily change settings Change default settings  
Operating system (from a software application) (across all applications)  
Windows 9x  
From the File menu, click Print, and Click the Start button, point to  
then click Properties. (The actual  
steps can vary; this is the most  
common method.)  
Settings, and then click Printers.  
Right-click the printer icon, and  
choose Properties.  
Windows NT 4.0  
Windows 2000  
From the File menu, click Print, and Click the Start button, point to  
then click Properties. (The actual  
steps can vary; this is the most  
common method.)  
Settings, and then click Printers.  
Right-click and choose Document  
Defaults or Properties.  
From the File menu, click Print, and Click the Start button, point to  
then click Properties. (The actual  
steps can vary; this is the most  
common method.)  
Settings, and then click Printers.  
Right-click and choose Printing  
Preferences or Properties.  
Windows 3.1x and  
Windows NT 3.51  
From the File menu, click Print, click From the Windows control panel,  
Printers, and then click Options.  
double-click Printers, highlight the  
(Theactualstepscanvary;thisisthe printer, and click Setup.  
most common method.)  
Note  
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control  
panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver  
settings.)  
36 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Choose the right printer driver for your needs  
Choose a printer driver based on the way you use the printer.  
G
Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of the printer’s  
features. Unless backward compatibility with previous PCL  
drivers or older printers is necessary, the PCL 6 driver is  
recommended.  
G
G
G
Use the PCL 5e driver if you want print results to look comparable  
to those from older printers, or for font DIMM support.  
Use the PS driver for compatibility with PostScript Level 2.  
Certain features are not available in this driver.  
The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer  
languages.  
Printer driver help  
Each printer driver has help screens that can be activated either from  
the Help button, the F1 key, or a question mark symbol in the upper  
right corner in the printer driver (depending on the Windows operating  
system used). These help screens give detailed information about the  
specific driver. Printer driver help is separate from the software  
application help.  
HP Resource Manager  
The HP Resource Manager should be installed only on the network  
administrator’s computer. The HP Resource Manager allows you to  
control the hard disk and flash memory accessory features not found  
in the drivers. Bidirectional communication is required.  
Use the HP Resource Manager to do the following:  
G
G
initialize disk and flash memory  
download, delete, and manage fonts and macros to disk and flash  
memory across networks  
• PostScript Type 1, PostScript Type 42, TrueType™ fonts  
converted to PostScript format, TrueType, and PCL bitmap  
fonts  
• To download Type 1 fonts, Adobe Type Manager must be  
loaded and turned on.  
You can obtain a copy of HP Resource Manager over the Internet.  
See “Online services” on page 157 for details.  
Note  
HP Resource Manager is not available for the Macintosh.  
EN  
Printer software 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
HP JetSend communications technology  
HP JetSend is a technology from Hewlett-  
Packard that allows devices to communicate  
with each other simply and directly. HP  
JetSend is built into your printer, allowing it to  
receive information from any HP JetSend-  
enabled sending device anywhere on your  
network, whether it is in the same office or at  
a remote location. When you use the HP Fast  
InfraRed Receiver accessory, your printer can also receive  
information from any HP JetSend-enabled infrared device. Examples  
of HP JetSend sending devices include computers or laptops running  
HP JetSend software or scanners with HP JetSend built in.  
HP JetSend uses simple IP addressing between networked devices  
and cableless communication between infrared devices.  
To enable HP JetSend on your computer or laptop, visit the  
HP JetSend website (www.jetsend.hp.com/products) for information  
on HP JetSend software. With the software, you will be able to  
exchange intra-company documents directly between two or more  
computers and send to any HP JetSend enabled printers, without the  
problems of incompatible software applications or versions.  
HP JetSend software will allow your colleagues to create documents  
on their computers and send copies directly to this printer without any  
device-specific drivers or configuration difficulties.  
You can visit the HP JetSend website to learn which other devices are  
available to communicate easily and directly with your HP JetSend-  
enabled printer.  
Note  
HP JetSend software is not supported for the languages of Japanese,  
Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese.  
38 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
How the JetSend communications technology works  
Networked devices  
To use the HP JetSend capability between networked devices, print a  
configuration page to find your HP JetSend IP address, and give your  
address to anyone who wants to send information to your printer via  
HP JetSend. (See “Configuration page” on page 152.)  
From an HP JetSend sending device, a person only needs to enter  
the printer’s IP address and press “send.”  
Infrared devices  
To use HP JetSend infrared capability, line up the infrared sensors  
between the sending and receiving devices, and choose the “send”  
option on the sending device.  
The devices will automatically negotiate the best possible outcome  
because they have HP JetSend in them.  
Note  
HP JetSend software is not available for the Macintosh computer.  
EN  
Printer software 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software for Macintosh computers  
PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs)  
PPDs, in combination with the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver, access the  
printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
printer. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is  
provided on the CD. Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver that comes  
with the computer.  
HP LaserJet Utility  
HP LaserJet Utility allows control of features that are not available in  
the driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features  
from the Macintosh computer easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet  
Utility to do the following:  
G
G
customize the printer control panel messages  
name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, download  
files and fonts, and change most of the printer settings  
G
G
set a password for the printer  
from the computer, lock out functions on the printer control panel  
to prevent unauthorized access (see the printer software help)  
G
configure and set the printer for IP printing  
Note  
The HP LaserJet Utility is not supported for the languages of Czech,  
Korean, Japanese, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,  
or Turkish.  
40 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Software for networks  
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration  
software solutions, see the HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s  
Guide. You can find this guide on the CD included with the printer.  
HP Web JetAdmin  
HP Web JetAdmin is a browser-based management tool and should  
be installed only on the network administrator’s computer. It can be  
installed and run on the following systems:  
G
G
G
G
G
Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 2000  
HP-UX  
Sun Solaris  
Red Hat Linux  
SuSE Linux  
HP Web JetAdmin is available from the Internet at  
http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.  
Note  
For the latest list of supported host systems, visit HP Customer Care  
Online at http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.  
When installed on a host server, HP Web JetAdmin can be accessed  
by any client through a supported web browser (such as Microsoft  
Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later) by browsing  
to the HP Web JetAdmin host.  
Use HP Web JetAdmin to do the following:  
G
Install and configure printers that are connected to a network with  
an HP JetDirect print server. When installed on a supported  
Microsoft host system, HP Web JetAdmin will configure Novell  
NetWare parameters on the HP JetDirect print server and  
NetWare server.  
G
Manage and troubleshoot network printers from any location.  
UNIX  
The HP JetDirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer  
installation utility for HP-UX and Solaris networks. It is available for  
download from HP Customer Care Online at  
http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing.  
EN  
Printer software 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
42 Chapter 1 - Printer basics  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing tasks  
2
Overview  
This chapter presents basic printing tasks, such as:  
G
G
G
G
G
selecting the output bin  
loading the trays  
printing on both sides of paper with the optional duplexer  
printing on special paper, such as letterhead and transparencies  
using the optional power envelope feeder  
This chapter also introduces some advanced printing tasks:  
G
G
printing multiple originals  
creating Quick Sets to save the printer’s setup information for  
different kinds of print jobs  
G
G
printing pages with a watermark in the background  
printing the first page of a document on a different kind of paper  
than the rest of the pages  
G
G
G
G
printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
printing booklets  
printing with ZoomSmart  
customizing what tray is used for printing  
EN  
Overview 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting the output bin  
The printer has two output locations: the rear output bin and the top  
output bin. To use the top output bin, be sure the rear output bin is  
closed. To use the rear output bin, open it.  
G
If paper coming out of the top output bin has problems, such as  
excessive curl, try printing to the rear output bin.  
G
To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear output bin  
while the printer is printing.  
Printing to the top output bin  
The top output bin collects paper face-down, in correct order. The top  
output bin should be used for most print jobs and for transparencies.  
44 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing to the rear output bin  
The printer always prints to the rear output bin if it is open. Paper  
printed to this bin will be face-up, with the last page on top.  
To open the rear output bin, grasp the handle at the top of the bin. Pull  
the bin down, and slide out the extension.  
Printing from tray 1 to the rear output bin provides the straightest  
paper path (which can reduce curl). Opening the rear output bin might  
improve performance with the following:  
G
G
G
G
envelopes  
labels  
small custom-size paper  
postcards  
G
paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2)  
Note  
Opening the rear output bin disables the optional duplexer (if installed)  
and the top output bin.  
EN  
Selecting the output bin 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading tray 1  
Tray 1 is a multi-purpose tray that holds  
up to 100 sheets of paper, 10 envelopes,  
or 20 index cards. The printer’s default is  
to pull paper from tray 1 first. To change  
this, see “Customizing tray 1 operation”  
on page 69.  
1
Tray 1 provides a convenient way to print  
envelopes, transparencies, custom-size  
paper, or other types of media without  
having to unload the other trays. It can  
also be used just as a convenient  
additional input tray. For supported sizes  
of paper, see “Supported sizes and  
weights of paper” on page 189.  
2
3
4
5
Note  
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays  
while the printer is printing.  
1
2
3
Open tray 1.  
Pull out the tray extension.  
Set the side guides to the desired  
width.  
4
Load paper in the tray.  
Note  
Make sure the paper fits under the tabs  
on the guides and not above the load  
level indicators.  
Generally, load paper with the side to be  
printed up, and the top, short edge  
toward the printer. For information on  
loading special paper, see “Printing  
special paper” on page 53.  
5
Adjust the side guides so that they  
lightly touch the paper stack but do  
not bend the paper.  
46 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Loading trays 2, 3, and 4  
Trays 2, 3, and 4 are 500-sheet paper  
trays. Tray 3 is optional and comes with  
the 4100TN and 4100DTN models. Tray  
4 is an additional 500-sheet option.  
1
The trays adjust for six standard sizes of  
media, as well as for many custom sizes  
(for details, see “Supported sizes and  
weights of paper - trays 2, 3, and 4” on  
page 190). Three adjustments on the  
trays let the printer sense the paper size  
that is loaded.  
2A  
Note  
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays  
while the printer is printing.  
1
2
Pull the tray completely out of the  
printer.  
2B  
If the tray is not already set to the  
desired paper size, you will need to  
make up to three adjustments:  
2A: To adjust the width, squeeze the  
lever on the left guide and slide the  
guides into place to match the width  
of the paper.  
2B: To adjust the length, squeeze  
the lever on the rear paper guide and  
slide it to the desired paper size until  
it clicks into place. Standard sizes  
are labeled. For A5-size paper, lift  
the metal backstop near the center  
of the tray.  
2C  
2C: To make the third adjustment,  
squeeze the blue tab located on the  
right side of the tray and move it to  
the correct position based on the  
paper size required.  
Continued on the next page.  
EN  
Loading trays 2, 3, and 4 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
4
Load paper into the tray.  
3
Make sure the paper is flat in the tray  
at all four corners and below the  
front and back tabs.  
5
Slide the tray back into the printer.  
Note  
If the tray is not properly adjusted, the  
printer might display an error message  
or paper might jam.  
4
For paper orientation when you are  
printing on both sides, see “Printing both  
sides of paper (optional duplexer)” on  
page 49. For information on loading  
special paper, see “Printing special  
paper” on page 53.  
5
48 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing both sides of paper (optional duplexer)  
The printer can automatically print on both sides of paper with an  
optional duplex printing accessory (duplexer). This is called  
duplexing.  
The duplexer supports the following paper sizes: Letter, Legal,  
Executive, A4, and B5 (JIS). It does not support custom sizes.  
Note  
See the documentation included with the duplexer for installation  
instructions. Duplexing might require additional memory (see “Printer  
memory and expansion” on page 229).  
The tray 2 dust cover must be removed when the optional duplexer is  
installed.  
Installed  
Removed  
EN  
Printing both sides of paper (optional duplexer) 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Guidelines for printing both sides of paper  
Note the following guidelines:  
G
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes,  
vellum, or paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2). Paper jamming  
might occur with these types of media, and damage to the printer  
might occur with labels.  
G
G
G
You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the  
duplexer. (See the printer driver online help for details.)  
To print on both sides of paper, make the selection from the  
software or printer driver. (See the printer driver online help.)  
If you do not use the printer driver that came with the printer, you  
might need to change the Duplex setting from the Paper Handling  
Menu in the printer control panel to DUPLEX=ON. Also in the Paper  
Handling Menu, set Binding to long edge or short edge. (For more  
information, see “Layout options for printing both sides of paper”  
on page 52.)  
G
Close the rear output bin to use the duplexer (see “Selecting the  
output bin” on page 44). Opening the rear output bin disables the  
duplexer.  
50 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Placement for paper requiring a specific  
orientation  
Several kinds of paper require a specific orientation when you  
duplex—for example, letterhead, preprinted paper, and paper with  
watermarks and prepunched holes. The duplexer prints the second  
side of paper first. Orient paper in the trays as shown below.  
Tray 1  
Trays 2, 3, 4  
For tray 1, load the front side facing down and the top toward you. For  
all other trays, load the front side facing up and the top toward the  
printer.  
EN  
Printing both sides of paper (optional duplexer) 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Layout options for printing both sides of  
paper  
The four duplex orientation options are shown below. These options  
can be selected from the printer driver or from the printer control  
panel (set BINDING from the Paper Handling Menu and ORIENTATION  
from the Printing Menu).  
1. Long-edge  
portrait  
2
2. Long-edge  
landscape*  
2
3
2
5
3
3
5
5
3
3. Short-edge  
portrait*  
2
5
4. Short-edge  
landscape  
1. Long-edge portrait  
This is the default printer setting, and the most common layout  
used, with every printed image oriented right side up. Facing  
pages are read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top  
to bottom on the right page.  
2. Long-edge landscape  
This layout is often used in accounting, data processing, and  
spreadsheet applications. Every other printed image is oriented  
upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to  
bottom.  
3. Short-edge portrait  
This layout is often used with clipboards. Every other printed  
image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read  
continuously from top to bottom.  
4. Short-edge landscape  
Each printed image is oriented right side up. Facing pages are  
read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top to bottom  
on the right page.  
Note  
When using Windows drivers, select “Flip Pages Up” to get the binding  
options designated with (*) above.  
52 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing special paper  
This section discusses printing on types of paper that require special  
handling:  
G
G
“Printing small or narrow paper” on page 53  
“Printing letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper (single-  
sided)” on page 53  
G
G
G
G
“Printing envelopes” on page 55  
“Printing labels” on page 61  
“Printing transparencies” on page 62  
“Printing cards, custom-size, and heavy paper” on page 63  
Printing small or narrow paper  
Follow the guidelines below if you will be printing primarily on small or  
narrow paper:  
G
Use the 6,000-page toner cartridge (part number C8061A). Toner  
might leak if large quantities of small or narrow media are printed  
using the 10,000-page cartridge (part number C8061X). (See  
“Ordering information” on page 22.)  
G
Print from tray 1 to the rear output bin if you experience problems  
such as paper jams or curl.  
See “Printing cards, custom-size, and heavy paper” on page 63 for  
further information on printing on non-standard sizes.  
Printing letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted  
paper (single-sided)  
When printing letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper, it is  
important to correctly orient the paper. For instructions, see the next  
page.  
Note  
Follow the guidelines in this section for printing on one side only. For  
guidelines on duplexing, see “Guidelines for printing both sides of  
paper” on page 50.  
EN  
Printing special paper 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
For tray 1, load paper with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and the  
top, short edge toward the printer.  
Paper orientation for tray 1  
For all other trays, load paper with the side-to-be-printed facing down,  
and the top edge toward you.  
Paper orientation for trays 2, 3, and 4  
54 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing envelopes  
With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed  
up to 75 envelopes. To order an envelope feeder, see “Ordering  
information” on page 22. To print with the envelope feeder, see  
“Feeding envelopes automatically (optional envelope feeder)” on  
page 57. For envelope specifications, see “Envelopes” on page 197.  
Many types of envelopes can be printed from tray 1. Up to 10 can be  
stacked in the tray. Printing performance depends on the construction  
of the envelope. Always test a few sample envelopes before  
purchasing a large quantity.  
G
In the software, set margins at least 15 mm (0.6 in) from the edge  
of the envelope.  
G
Open the rear output bin to get a straight paper path. This  
produces better results if envelopes are curling.  
If you print large quantities of envelopes continuously or if you  
interleave envelopes with wide media, you might need to select SMALL  
PAPER SPEED = SLOW at the printer control panel. This setting reduces  
the throughput speed of narrow media to allow the heat generated  
from printing this media to dissipate. Although using this feature will  
slow your printer's throughput speed, it will help protect your printer  
from damage while ensuring excellent print quality.  
WARNING!  
CAUTION  
Never use envelopes with coated linings, exposed self-stick adhesives,  
or other synthetic materials. These items can emit noxious fumes.  
Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-  
stick adhesives, or other synthetic materials can severely damage the  
printer.  
To avoid jamming and possible printer damage, never try to print on  
both sides of an envelope.  
Before you load envelopes, make sure they are flat and not damaged  
or stuck together. Do not use envelopes with pressure-sensitive  
adhesive.  
EN  
Printing special paper 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading envelopes in tray 1  
1
Open tray 1, but do not pull out the  
extension. (Most envelopes feed  
best without the extension. However,  
oversize envelopes might need the  
extension.)  
1
2
Load up to 10 envelopes in the  
center of tray 1 with the side-to-be-  
printed facing up, and the postage-  
end toward the printer. Slide the  
envelopes into the printer as far as  
they will go without forcing them.  
2
3
Adjust the guides to touch the  
envelope stack without bending the  
envelopes. Make sure the envelopes  
fit under the tabs on the guides.  
Note  
If envelopes curl, use the rear output bin  
(see “Printing to the rear output bin” on  
page 45).  
3
56 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feeding envelopes automatically (optional envelope  
feeder)  
With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed  
up to 75 envelopes. To print envelopes without an envelope feeder,  
see “Printing envelopes” on page 55.  
The envelope feeder supports only standard-size envelopes (see  
“Supported sizes and weights of paper - optional envelope feeder” on  
page 191).  
Note  
See the documentation included with the envelope feeder for  
installation instructions.  
You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the  
envelope feeder. See the printer driver online help for details.  
Release lever  
Guides  
Envelope  
weight  
Tray  
extension  
EN  
Printing special paper 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Inserting and removing the  
envelope feeder  
1
1
2
Open tray 1.  
Remove the plastic cover from the  
printer. (Replace the cover when the  
envelope feeder is not attached.)  
3
4
Insert the envelope feeder into the  
printer until it locks into place. (The  
connector on the top right side of the  
envelope feeder fits into the plug in  
the printer.) Pull gently on the  
envelope feeder to be sure that it is  
securely in place.  
2
To remove the envelope feeder,  
press the release button on the left  
side and pull the envelope feeder  
away from the printer.  
3
4
58 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading envelopes in the  
envelope feeder  
Note  
1
2
Print only on envelopes approved for use  
in the printer (see “Printing envelopes”  
on page 55 and “Envelopes” on  
page 197).  
1
2
Fold down the tray extension. Lift the  
envelope weight.  
Squeeze the release lever on the left  
envelope guide and slide the guides  
apart.  
3
Load envelopes into the envelope  
feeder with the side-to-be-printed  
facing up, and the postage end  
toward the printer. Push the  
envelopes into the envelope feeder  
as far as they will go without forcing  
them. Push the bottom envelopes in  
slightly farther than the top  
3
envelopes. (Stack them as shown.)  
Continued on the next page.  
EN  
Printing special paper 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Adjust the guides to touch the  
envelopes without bending them.  
Make sure the envelope feeder is not  
overfilled.  
4
Lower the envelope weight onto the  
envelopes.  
Note  
Select the envelope size from the  
software application (if the setting is  
available), the printer driver, and the  
Paper Handling Menu in the printer  
control panel (see “Paper Handling  
Menu” on page 210). To print by type  
and size of paper, see “Printing by type  
and size of paper (locking trays)” on  
page 70.  
5
60 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing labels  
Use only labels recommended for use in laser printers. Make sure  
that labels meet the correct specifications (see “Labels” on  
page 196).  
Do:  
G
Print a stack of up to 50 labels from tray 1 or a stack of 50 to 100  
labels from other trays.  
G
Load labels in tray 1 with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and the  
top, short edge toward the printer. For other trays, load paper with  
the side-to-be-printed facing down, and the top edge toward you.  
G
Try opening the rear output bin to reduce curl and other problems  
(see “Printing to the rear output bin” on page 45).  
Do not:  
G
G
G
G
Do not load the trays to capacity because labels are heavier than  
paper.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet,  
wrinkled, or damaged in any way.  
Do not use labels that have the backing sheet exposed. (Labels  
must cover the entire backing sheet with no exposed spaces.)  
Do not feed a sheet of labels through the printer more than once.  
The adhesive backing is designed for only one pass through the  
printer.  
G
G
Do not print on both sides of labels.  
Do not print on sheets from which labels have been removed.  
CAUTION  
Failure to follow these instructions can damage the printer.  
EN  
Printing special paper 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing transparencies  
Use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers. For  
transparency specifications, see “Transparencies” on page 196  
G
G
Load transparencies face up in tray 1 with the top toward the  
printer. Up to 50 transparencies can be loaded in tray 1.  
A stack of 50 to 100 transparencies can be printed from tray 2, 3,  
or 4 (although stacking more than 50 at a time is not  
recommended). Because transparencies are heavier than paper,  
do not load tray 2, 3, or 4 to capacity. Load them with the side-to-  
be-printed facing down, and the top edge toward you.  
G
G
To prevent transparencies from becoming too hot or sticking  
together, use the top output bin.  
Remove each transparency from the output bin before printing  
another.  
G
G
G
Do not feed transparencies through the printer more than once.  
Print only on one side of a transparency.  
Place transparencies on a flat surface to cool after removing them  
from the printer.  
G
G
Select the transparency paper type from the printer driver so that  
the printer uses the low fuser mode that is best for printing them.  
If two or more transparencies feed at the same time, try fanning  
the stack.  
62 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing cards, custom-size, and heavy paper  
Custom-size paper can be printed from any tray. For paper  
specifications, see “Paper specifications” on page 188.  
Tray  
Minimum size  
Maximum size  
Tray 1  
76 by 127 mm  
(3 by 5 in)  
216 by 356 mm  
(8.5 by 14 in)  
Tray 2, 3, or 4  
148 by 210 mm  
(5.8 by 8.2 in)  
216 by 356 mm  
(8.5 by 14 in)  
The maximum paper weight is 199 g/m2 (53 lb) from tray 1 and  
105 g/m2 (28 lb) from trays 2, 3, and 4.  
Note  
To prevent curl and other problems, heavy paper and very small  
custom-size paper should be printed from tray 1 to the rear output bin.  
Open the rear output bin to use it (see “Printing to the rear output bin”  
on page 45).  
The printer control panel can be set for one custom size at a time. Do  
not load more than one size of custom paper into the printer.  
Guidelines for printing custom-size paper  
G
G
G
Do not attempt to print on paper smaller than 76 mm (3 in) wide  
or 127 mm (5 in) long.  
In the software application, set page margins at least 4.23 mm  
(0.17 in) away from the edges.  
Feed short-edge first.  
Setting custom paper sizes  
When custom paper is loaded, size settings need to be selected from  
the software application (the preferred method), the printer driver, and  
the printer control panel.  
EN  
Printing special paper 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Note  
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control  
panel settings. (Software application settings generally override printer  
driver settings.)  
X (front edge)  
Feed short  
edge first  
Y (side edge)  
If the settings are not available from the software, set the custom  
paper size from the control panel:  
1
2
From the Printing Menu set CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES.  
From the Printing Menu, select inches or millimeters as the unit of  
measurement.  
3
4
From the Printing Menu, set the X dimension (the front edge of  
the paper) as shown in the figure above. The X dimension can be  
76 to 216 mm (3 to 8.5 in).  
Set the Y dimension (the side edge of the paper) as shown in the  
figure above. The Y dimension can be 127 to 356 mm (5 to 14 in).  
For example, if the custom paper is 203 by 254 mm (8 by 10 in),  
set X=203 mm and Y=254.  
5
If custom paper is loaded into tray 1, set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE  
and then set TRAY 1 SIZE=CUSTOM from the Paper Handling  
Menu in the printer control panel. See “Customizing tray 1  
operation” on page 69.  
If custom paper is loaded in tray 2, 3, or 4, be sure the paper size  
slider is set to Custom (see “Loading trays 2, 3, and 4” on  
page 47).  
64 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced printing tasks  
This section will help you take full advantage of the printer’s features.  
Using features in the printer driver  
When you print from a software application, many of the printer’s  
features are available from the printer driver. To access Windows  
printer drivers, see “Access the Windows printer driver” on page 36.  
Note  
Certain printer features might not be available with all drivers. Check  
the drivers for available options.  
Settingsintheprinterdriverandsoftwareapplicationgenerallyoverride  
control panel settings. (Software application settings generally override  
printer driver settings.)  
Printer collation  
The Printer Collation feature, only available with a minimum of 32 MB  
of RAM or a hard disk accessory, allows multiple original prints  
(mopying) that provides you the following advantages:  
G
G
G
reduces network traffic  
faster return to application  
all documents are original  
Note  
See the application or printer driver online help for specific steps.  
RIP ONCE  
RIP ONCE allows the print job to be processed one time at the  
printer. The RIP ONCE capability creates an image of the page then  
saves a compressed image of the page into memory. RIP ONCE is  
enabled when a minimum of 32 MB of RAM or a hard disk accessory  
is installed in the printer. Pages are printed by decompressing page  
images without pausing to process the print job again. The print job  
will print exactly the same every time because the compressed image  
is not dependent on any other printer data.  
EN  
Advanced printing tasks 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Saving printer setup information (Quick Sets)  
Printer drivers allow you to save the printer settings you use most  
often as the default settings. For example, the driver might be set to  
print on letter size paper, portrait orientation, with automatic tray  
selection (from the first available tray).  
Windows PCL 6 and PCL 5e printer drivers will allow you to save  
printer settings for multiple kinds of print jobs. For example, you might  
want to create a Quick Set for envelopes, or for printing the first page  
of a document on letterhead.  
See the printer driver online help for more information on the Quick  
Sets feature.  
Scaling page image (ZoomSmart)  
Windows PCL 6 and PCL 5e printer drivers include a feature called  
ZoomSmart that lets you scale the page image from any page size to  
any page size. You can do this either by a numeric percentage or by  
specifying a different paper size scale.  
See the printer driver online help for more information on the  
ZoomSmart feature.  
Printing booklets  
Windows PCL 6 and PCL 5e printer drivers let you control the printing  
of booklets when duplexing. You have the choice of binding on the left  
or right side on Letter, Legal, or A4 paper size.  
See the printer driver online help for more information on this feature.  
Printing with a watermark  
A watermark is a notice, such as “Top Secret,” printed in the  
background of each page in a document. Check the driver for  
available options, or see the printer driver online help for more  
information.  
66 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Different first page  
Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from  
other pages in the print job.  
1
For Windows, select “Use different paper for first page” in your  
printer driver. Choose one tray (or Manual Feed) for the first page  
and one of the other trays for the remaining pages. Place the  
paper for the first page in tray 1 (or whichever tray you selected).  
(For manual feed, place paper in tray 1 after the job is sent to the  
printer and the printer requests paper.) For loading tray 1, place  
the paper with the side-to-be-printed up, the top of the page  
facing the rear of the printer.  
For Macintosh computers, select “First from” and “Remaining  
from” in the print dialog box.  
Note  
Where and how you make selections depends on your software  
application or associated printer driver. (Some options may only be  
available through the printer driver.)  
2
Load the paper for the remaining pages of the document into  
another tray. You may select the first and remaining pages by type  
of paper. For more information, see “Manually feeding paper from  
tray 1” on page 71.  
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper (n-up)  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This  
feature is available in some printer drivers, and provides a cost-  
effective way to print draft pages.  
To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a Layout or  
Pages Per Sheet option in the printer driver. (This is sometimes called  
2-up, 4-up, or n-up printing.)  
EN  
Advanced printing tasks 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Customizing what tray is used for printing  
Understanding tray order  
When the printer receives a print job, it selects the paper tray by trying  
to match the requested paper type and size with what has been  
loaded in the trays. Using an “autoselect” process, it searches all  
available input paper trays for the paper that satisfies the request,  
starting with the bottom tray and ending with the top tray (tray 1). The  
printer begins printing the job as soon as it finds the proper type/size.  
If any paper is loaded in tray 1 and tray 1 is set to FIRSTmode in the  
Paper Handling Menu, the printer will always pull paper from tray 1  
first. (See the explanation of FIRST mode in “Customizing tray 1  
operation” on page 69.)  
If the search fails, the printer displays a message on the control panel  
requesting you to load the correct paper type/size. You can load that  
paper type/size, or you can override the request by entering a  
different type/size at the control panel.  
If a tray runs out of paper during a print job, the printer automatically  
switches to any paper tray that contains the same paper type/size.  
The autoselect process changes somewhat if you customize tray 1  
operation (as explained in “Customizing tray 1 operation” on page 69)  
or set tray 1 for manual feed (as explained in “Manually feeding paper  
from tray 1” on page 71).  
68 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Customizing tray 1 operation  
The printer can be set to print from tray 1 as long as it is loaded, or to  
print only from tray 1 if the type of paper loaded is specifically  
requested. Set TRAY 1 MODE=FIRSTor TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTEin  
the Paper Handling Menu at the printer control panel (see “Paper  
Handling Menu” on page 210).  
Setting  
Explanation  
Means that the printer usually pulls paper from  
tray 1 first unless it is empty or closed. If you do not  
keep paper in tray 1 all the time, or you use tray 1  
only for manually feeding paper, keep the default  
setting of TRAY 1 MODE=FIRSTin the Paper  
Handling Menu.  
TRAY 1  
MODE=FIRST  
Means that the printer treats tray 1 like trays 2, 3,  
and 4. Instead of looking for paper in tray 1 first, the  
printer pulls paper from the tray that matches type  
and size settings selected from the software.  
TRAY 1  
MODE=CASSETTE  
When TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTEis set, an option  
appears in the Paper Handling Menu to configure  
size as well as type settings for tray 1.  
Through the printer driver, you can select paper  
from any tray (including tray 1) by type, size, or  
source. To print by type and size of paper, see  
“Printing by type and size of paper (locking trays)”  
on page 70.  
EN  
Advanced printing tasks 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing by type and size of paper (locking trays)  
You can configure the printer to select paper by type (such as plain or  
letterhead) and size (such as letter or A4), as opposed to source (a  
paper tray).  
See “Supported sizes and weights of paper” on page 189 and  
“Supported types of paper” on on page 192.  
Benefits of printing by type and size of paper  
If you frequently use several different kinds of paper, once trays are  
set up correctly, you do not have to check which paper is loaded in  
each tray before you print. This is especially helpful when the printer  
is shared, and more than one person loads or removes paper.  
Printing by type and size of paper is a way to be sure that print jobs  
always print on the desired paper. (Some older model printers have a  
feature which “locks out” trays to prevent printing on the wrong paper.  
Printing by type and size of paper eliminates the need to lock out  
trays.)  
To print by type and size of paper  
1
2
Be sure to load the trays correctly and make all three  
adjustments. (See the sections on loading paper, starting with  
“Loading tray 1” on page 46).  
From the Paper Handling Menu in the printer control panel, select  
the paper type for each tray. If you are unsure what type you are  
loading (such as bond or recycled), check the label on the  
package of paper.  
3
Select the paper size settings from the control panel.  
• Tray 1: If the printer has been set to TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE  
from the Paper Handling Menu, also set the paper size from  
the Paper Handling Menu. If custom paper is loaded, set the  
size of custom paper from the Printing Menu to match the  
paper loaded in tray 1. To print custom-size paper, see  
“Guidelines for printing custom-size paper” on page 63.  
• Trays 2, 3, and 4: Paper size is automatically detected when  
paper is properly loaded into the tray and the paper size  
adjustments have been made to match the paper size (see  
“Loading trays 2, 3, and 4” on page 47 for information on tray  
adjustments). If custom paper is loaded, set the size of custom  
paper from the Printing Menu to match the paper loaded in the  
tray. Set the paper size slider in the tray to Custom. To print  
custom-size paper, see “Guidelines for printing custom-size  
paper” on page 63.  
70 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Optional envelope feeder: Set the paper size from the Paper  
Handling Menu.  
4
From the software or printer driver, select the desired type and  
size of paper.  
Note  
The type and size settings can also be configured from HP Web  
JetAdmin software for networked printers. See the printer driver online  
help.  
To print by type and size, it might be necessary to unload or close tray  
1, or set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTEfrom the Paper Handling Menu in the  
printer control panel. For more information, see “Customizing tray 1  
operation” on page 69.  
Settings in the printer driver and software application override control  
panel settings. (Software application settings generally override printer  
driver settings.)  
Manually feeding paper from tray 1  
The manual feed feature is another way of printing on special paper  
from tray 1. Setting manual feed to on either from the printer control  
panel or from the printer driver will stop the printer after each job is  
sent, allowing you time to load special media in tray 1. Press GO to  
continue printing.  
If there is already paper in tray 1 when you send the print job and the  
printer control panel has TRAY 1= FIRSTas the default configuration  
for tray 1 operation, the printer will not stop and wait for paper to be  
loaded. To use this feature, set TRAY 1=CASSETTEin the Paper  
Handling Menu (see the description of “TRAY 1 MODE= FIRST” on  
page 210).  
If you have selected MANUAL FEED=ONin the printer control panel, this  
setting will override the printer driver, and all print jobs sent to the  
printer will request manually fed paper in tray 1 unless a specific tray  
has been selected from the printer driver. If this feature is to be used  
only occasionally, it is best to set MANUAL FEED=OFFin the printer  
control panel and to select the manual feed option from within the  
printer driver on a job-by-job basis.  
EN  
Advanced printing tasks 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Job retention features  
To use the job retention features listed below, you must install a hard  
disk accessory in the printer and properly configure the drivers.  
To support job retention features for complex jobs, HP recommends  
that you install additional memory (see “Ordering information” on  
page 22).  
CAUTION  
Makesuretoidentifyyourjobsintheprinterdriverbeforeprinting. Using  
default names may override previous jobs with the same default name  
or cause the job to be deleted.  
Quick copying a job  
The quick copy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job  
and stores a copy on the printer’s hard disk accessory. Additional  
copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off  
from the driver.  
For more information about specifying the number of quick copy jobs  
that can be stored, see the QUICK COPY JOBScontrol panel item  
described in “Quick Copy Jobs Menu” on page 206.  
Printing additional copies of a quick copy job  
To print additional copies of a job stored on the printer’s hard disk  
accessory from the control panel:  
1
2
3
Press MENU repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENUappears.  
Press ITEM until the desired user or job name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
6
Press SELECT to select the job. COPIES=1appears.  
Press -VALUE+ until the desired number of copies appears.  
Press SELECT to print the job.  
72 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Deleting a quick copy job  
When a user sends a quick copy job, the printer overwrites any  
previous jobs with the same user and job name. If there is not a quick  
copy job already stored under the same user and job name and the  
printer needs additional space, the printer may delete other quick  
copy jobs starting with the oldest job. The default number of quick  
copy jobs that can be stored is 32. The number of quick copy jobs that  
can be stored is set from the control panel (see the description of  
“QUICK COPY JOBS=32” on page 221).  
Note  
If you turn the printer off, all quick copy, proof and hold, and private jobs  
are deleted. A quick copy job can also be deleted from the control panel  
or from HP Web JetAdmin.  
1
2
3
Press MENU repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENUappears.  
Press ITEM until the desired user name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
6
Press SELECT to select the job. COPIES=1appears.  
Press -VALUE+ until DELETEappears.  
Press SELECT to delete the job.  
EN  
Job retention features 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Proofing and holding a job  
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and  
proof one copy of a job and then print the additional copies.  
To permanently store the job and prevent the printer from deleting it  
when space is needed for something else, select the Stored Job  
option in the driver.  
Printing the remaining copies of a held job  
The user can print the remaining copies of a job held on the printer’s  
hard disk accessory from the control panel.  
1
2
3
Press MENU repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENUappears.  
Press ITEM until the desired user name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
6
Press SELECT to select the job. COPIES=1appears.  
Press -VALUE+ until the desired number of copies appears.  
Press SELECT to print the job.  
74 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Deleting a held job  
When a user sends a proof and hold job, the printer automatically  
deletes that user’s previous proof and hold job. If there is not a proof  
and hold job already for that job name and the printer needs  
additional space, the printer may delete other proof and hold jobs  
starting with the oldest one.  
Note  
If you turn the printer off, all quick copy, proof and hold, and private jobs  
are deleted. A job can also be deleted from the control panel.  
1
2
3
Press MENU repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENUappears.  
Press ITEM until the desired user name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
6
Press SELECT to select the job. COPIES=1appears.  
Press -VALUE+ until DELETEappears.  
Press SELECT to delete the job.  
EN  
Job retention features 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing a private job  
The private printing feature lets a user specify that a job is not printed  
until that user releases it using a 4-digit personal identification  
number (PIN) through the printer control panel. The user specifies the  
PIN in the driver and it is sent to the printer as part of the print job.  
Specifying a private job  
To specify that a job is private from the driver, select the Private Job  
option and type a 4-digit PIN.  
Releasing a private job  
The user can print a private job from the control panel.  
1
Press MENU repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU  
appears.  
2
3
Press ITEM until the desired user name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
Press SELECT PIN:0000appears.  
Press -VALUE+ to change the first number of the PIN, and then  
press SELECT. An *appears in place of the number. Repeat these  
steps to change the remaining three numbers of the PIN.  
COPIES=1appears.  
6
7
Press -VALUE + until the desired number of copies appears.  
Press SELECT to print the job.  
76 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Deleting a private job  
A private job is automatically deleted from the printer’s hard disk  
accessory after the user releases it for printing, unless the user  
selects the Stored Job option in the driver.  
Note  
If you turn the printer off, all quick copy, proof and hold, and private jobs  
are deleted. A private job can also be deleted from the printer control  
panel before it is ever printed.  
1
Press MENU repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU  
appears.  
2
3
Press ITEM until the desired user name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
Press SELECT to select the job. PIN:0000appears.  
Press -VALUE+ to change the first number of the PIN, and then  
press SELECT. An *appears in place of the number. Repeat these  
steps to change the remaining three numbers of the PIN.  
COPIES=1appears.  
6
7
Press -VALUE+ until DELETEappears.  
Press SELECT to delete the job.  
EN  
Job retention features 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing a print job  
The user can download a print job to the printer’s hard disk accessory  
without printing it. The user can then print the job at any time through  
the printer control panel. For example, a user may want to download a  
personnel form, calendar, time sheet, or accounting form that other  
users can access and print.  
To store a print job permanently on the hard disk accessory, select  
the Stored Job option in the driver when printing the job.  
Printing a stored job  
The user can print a job stored on the printer’s hard disk accessory  
from the control panel.  
1
Press MENU repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU  
appears.  
2
3
Press ITEM until the desired user name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
6
Press SELECT to select the job name. COPIES=1appears.  
Press -VALUE+ until the desired number of copies appears.  
Press SELECT to print the job.  
78 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Deleting a stored job  
Jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk accessory can be deleted from  
the control panel.  
1
Press MENU repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU  
appears.  
2
3
Press ITEM until the desired user name appears.  
For Macintosh computers only: The user name appears on the  
first line of the display and the job name appears on the second  
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name  
using ITEM, press -VALUE+ until the desired job name appears.  
4
5
6
Press SELECT to select the job. COPIES=1appears.  
Press -VALUE+ until DELETEappears.  
Press SELECT to delete the job.  
EN  
Storing a print job 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing with the optional HP Fast InfraRed  
Receiver  
The optional HP Fast InfraRed Receiver enables wireless printing  
from any IRDA-compliant portable device (such as a laptop computer)  
to the HP LaserJet Series printers.  
The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending  
infrared (FIR) port within operating range. Note that the connection  
can be blocked by objects such as a hand, paper, direct sunlight, or  
any bright light shining into either FIR port.  
Note  
For more information, see the user guide that came with the HP Fast  
InfraRed Receiver.  
If your operating system does not have infrared software installed,  
contact your computer manufacturer for drivers and installation  
instructions.  
Setting up to print with Windows 9x  
Before launching the InfraRed Driver, complete the following steps:  
1
2
Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.  
Select the HP LaserJet 4100, 4100N, 4100TN, or 4100DTN as  
your default printer.  
3
4
While in the same Printers folder, choose Properties/Details,  
and make sure that Virtual Infrared LPT Port is selected.  
Select the file to print.  
Setting up to print with Macintosh computers  
The first step for setting up an infrared printer is creating a Desktop  
Printer icon using the Desktop Printer Utility. By default, the Desktop  
Printer Utility is located in the Apple Extras/Apple LaserWriter  
folder on the hard drive.  
Printer IR will not be an option if the Infrared Control Panel and  
extensions are not active. In addition, the infrared print capability is  
possible only with the HP LaserWriter version 8.6 driver or later.  
1
2
Launch the Desktop Utility.  
Select Printer IR (Infrared) and click OK.  
80 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Change PostScript Printer Description (PPD) File to match the  
printer.  
4
5
On the File menu, select Save.  
Enter a name and location for the desktop printer icon and click  
OK.  
Note  
Once the icon is on the desktop (or saved elsewhere), printer options  
need to be manually configured. This step is essentially the same as  
selecting Configure after setting up a printer in the Chooser. To set the  
options, highlight the Desktop Printer icon and select Change Setup  
from the Printing menu.  
Printing a job  
1
Align your laptop computer (or other portable device equipped  
with an IRDA-compliant FIR window) within 1 meter (3 feet)  
maximum of the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver. The FIR window  
must be at an angle of within +/- 15 degrees relative to the printer  
to ensure an effective connection for printing.  
2
Print the job. The status indicator on the HP Fast InfraRed  
Receiver lights up, and, after a short delay, the printer status  
panel displays PROCESSING JOB.  
If the status indicator does not light up, realign the HP Fast InfraRed  
Receiver with the FIR port on the sending device, resend the print job,  
and maintain the alignment of all devices. If you have to move the  
equipment (for example, to add paper), make sure that all devices  
remain within the range of operation to maintain the connection.  
If the connection is interrupted before your print job is complete, the  
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver status indicator turns off. You have up to  
40 seconds to correct the interruption and continue the job. If the  
connection is resumed within this time, the status indicator lights up  
again.  
Note  
The connection is permanently broken if the sending port is moved out  
of operating range or if anything passing between the ports blocks  
transmission for more than 40 seconds. (This block could be a hand,  
paper, orevendirectsunlight.)Dependingonthesizeofthejob, printing  
with the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver may be slower than printing with a  
cable connected directly to the parallel port.  
EN  
Printing with the optional HP Fast InfraRed Receiver 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interrupting and resuming printing  
The job interrupt and resume feature lets you temporarily stop the job  
that is currently printing in order to print another job through an FIR  
connection. When the FIR job is finished printing, the interrupted job  
resumes printing.  
To interrupt the job at the printer, connect to the FIR port on the  
printer and send a job to the printer. The printer stops printing the  
current job when it reaches the end of the copy it is printing. The  
printer then prints the job sent over the FIR connection. When the  
printer is done printing that job, it resumes printing the original job  
with multiple copies where it left off.  
82 Chapter 2 - Printing tasks  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer maintenance  
3
Overview  
This chapter explains basic printer maintenance:  
G
G
G
G
G
managing the toner cartridge  
cleaning the printer  
cleaning the fuser (manual and automatic)  
performing preventative maintenance  
configuring alerts  
EN  
Overview 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Managing the toner cartridge  
HP toner cartridges  
When you use a genuine new HP toner cartridge (part number  
C8061A or C8061X), you can obtain the following types of supplies  
information:  
G
G
G
G
amount of toner remaining  
estimated number of pages remaining  
number of pages printed  
other supplies information  
Non-HP toner cartridges  
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP toner  
cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not  
HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality.  
Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP toner  
cartridge will not be covered under the printer warranty.  
When you use a non-HP toner cartridge, the printer is unable to  
report on the number of pages that can still be printed with the  
amount of toner left in the cartridge. The toner level estimate will only  
be an approximate percentage.  
If the non-HP toner cartridge was sold to you as a genuine HP  
product, please call HP’s fraud hotline (see “HP fraud hotline” on  
page 161).  
Toner cartridge authentication  
The printer will let you know that a cartridge is not a genuine HP toner  
cartridge when you insert it in the printer. If you insert a used HP  
cartridge from another HP printer, the printer can take up to 20  
printed pages to receive the message authenticating that the  
cartridge is a genuine HP part.  
If the printer control panel message states that this is not a genuine  
HP toner cartridge and you believe you purchased an HP cartridge,  
call the HP fraud hotline at 1-887-219-3183 (toll-free in North  
America).  
84 Chapter 3 - Printer maintenance  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Toner cartridge storage  
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until you are  
ready to use it. The shelf life of a cartridge in an unopened package is  
approximately 2.5 years.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for  
more than a few minutes.  
Toner cartridge life expectancy  
The life of the toner cartridge depends on the amount of toner that  
print jobs require. When printing text at 5% coverage, an HP toner  
cartridge lasts an average of 10,000 or 6,000 pages, depending on  
which toner cartridge is installed. (A typical business letter is about  
5% coverage.) This assumes that print density is set to 3 and  
EconoMode is off. (These are the default settings. For details on other  
settings, see the description of ECONOMODEand TONER DENSITY in  
“Print Quality Menu” on page 217.)  
At any time, you can verify life expectancy by checking the toner level,  
as described below.  
Checking the toner level  
You can check the toner level using the printer control panel, the  
embedded web server, printer software, or HP Web JetAdmin.  
Using the printer control panel  
1
2
3
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.  
Press ITEM until PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE appears.  
Press SELECT to print the supplies status page. See “Supplies  
status page” on page 154 for information on the supplies status  
page.  
Using the embedded web server  
1
In your web browser, enter the IP address for the printer home  
page. This takes you to the printer status page. (See “Accessing  
the embedded web server” on page 252.)  
2
On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes  
you to the supplies status page, which provides toner level  
information. See “Supplies status page” on page 154 for  
information on the supplies status page.  
EN  
Managing the toner cartridge 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using printer software  
Three things are required to use this feature:  
G
the “Supplies Information and Ordering” software must be  
installed on your computer (use the custom installation option to  
install this software)  
G
G
the printer must be directly connected to your computer (parallel)  
you must have access to the World Wide Web  
1
2
3
At the bottom right of your screen (in the system tray), double-  
click the Printer icon. This opens the status window.  
On the left side of the status window, click the Printer icon from  
which you wish to obtain status.  
At the top of the status window, click the Supplies link. You can  
also scroll down to Supplies Status.  
Note  
If you want to order supplies, click Order Supplies. This opens a  
browser that produces a URL from which to purchase consumables.  
Select the supplies you wish to order and finish the ordering process.  
Using HP Web JetAdmin  
In HP Web JetAdmin, select the printer device. The device status  
page shows toner level information.  
Cartridge interaction (shaking)  
When you install a toner cartridge for the first time, gently shake it  
from side to side to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
Due to new cartridge design, this is the only time you will need to  
shake the cartridge.  
86 Chapter 3 - Printer maintenance  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Toner low and toner out conditions  
When toner is low  
When toner is low, the printer control panel displays a TONER LOW  
message and the printer continues to print. The message first  
appears when about 15% of the toner remains in the cartridge (about  
1,500 pages remaining for the 10,000-page cartridge and about 900  
pages remaining for the 6,000-page cartridge at 5% page coverage).  
You might prefer to have the printer stop instead of continuing when  
the TONER LOWmessage first appears—for example, if you want print  
quality to remain consistently high during print jobs or if you do not  
want toner to run out during a long print job. To configure the printer to  
stop, change the TONER LOWmenu item on the Print Quality Menu  
from CONTINUEto STOP(see “TONER LOW= CONTINUE” on page 219).  
Then when TONER LOW appears, the printer will stop printing. You can  
resume printing by pressing GO.  
When toner is out  
When the toner cartridge runs out of toner, the printer control panel  
displays a TONER OUTmessage and the printer stops printing. You  
can continue printing the current job by pressing GO. The message  
continues to appear for every job until you take one of the following  
actions:  
G
G
replace the toner cartridge  
press GO (the printer will print the current job)  
If you want the printer to continue printing when TONER OUTappears,  
change the TONER OUTmenu item on the Print Quality Menu from  
STOPto CONTINUE(see “TONER OUT= STOP” on page 219). Subsequent  
jobs will continue to print indefinitely while TONER OUTis displayed.  
EN  
Managing the toner cartridge 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cleaning the printer  
General guidelines  
Follow the cleaning procedure on the following page every time you  
change the toner cartridge or whenever print quality problems occur.  
As much as possible, keep the printer free from dust and debris.  
G
Clean the outside of the printer with a slightly water-dampened  
cloth.  
G
Clean the inside with a dry, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION  
Do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer.  
While cleaning the printer, be careful not to touch the transfer roller (the  
black, rubber roller located underneath the toner cartridge). Skin oils  
on the roller can cause print quality problems.  
88 Chapter 3 - Printer maintenance  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cleaning procedure  
1
2
Turn the printer off and unplug the  
power cord.  
1
Open the top cover and remove the  
toner cartridge.  
WARNING!  
Avoid reaching too far into the printer.  
The adjacent fusing area might be hot!  
2
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the toner  
cartridge, do not expose it to light for  
more than a few minutes.  
3
Wipe any dust or dirt off the paper  
feed guides (shaded areas) with a  
dry, lint-free cloth.  
3
Note  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off  
with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold  
water. (Hot water sets toner into fabric.)  
4
Using the green handle, lift the paper  
access plate and wipe off any  
residue with a dry, lint-free cloth.  
Continued on the next page.  
4
EN  
Cleaning the printer 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
Reinstall the toner cartridge, close  
the top cover, plug the power cord in,  
and turn the printer on.  
5
90 Chapter 3 - Printer maintenance  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the fuser  
Run the printer cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and  
paper particles that can sometimes accumulate. Accumulation of  
toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the front or back  
side of your print jobs (see “Specks” on page 130).  
To ensure optimum print quality, HP recommends that you use the  
cleaning page every time you replace the toner cartridge or on an  
automatic schedule that you can set up.  
You can run a cleaning page in two ways:  
G
G
manually as needed from the printer control panel  
automatically according to an interval that you set  
The cleaning procedure takes about 2.5 minutes to complete. A  
message on the control appears while the cleaning is taking place  
(either PROCESSING CLEANING PAGEor PROCESSING AUTO CLEANING  
PAGE).  
Running the cleaning page manually  
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on  
copier grade paper (not bond, heavy, or rough paper).  
To run the cleaning page manually:  
1
At the printer control panel, press MENU until PRINT QUALITY  
MENUappears.  
2
3
Press ITEM until CREATE CLEANING PAGEappears.  
Press SELECT to create the cleaning page. A page with a black  
stripe prints.  
4
Follow the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the  
cleaning process.  
EN  
Cleaning the fuser 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Running the cleaning page automatically  
Using the procedure below, you can set the printer to print cleaning  
pages automatically at an interval that you choose.  
In order for the cleaning page to run without intervention, you must  
keep the selected size and Plain paper type available in the printer.  
The printer will not interrupt a printing job in process.  
You can discard the output page created by the automatic cleaning  
process.  
To set the cleaning page to run automatically:  
1
At the printer control panel, press MENU until PRINT QUALITY  
MENUappears.  
2
3
4
Press ITEM until AUTO CLEANING PAGE=OFF appears.  
Press -VALUE+ to change OFFto ONand then press SELECT.  
Press ITEM until AUTO CLEANING FREQUENCY=2000 appears.  
The default frequency is every 2,000 pages. To change this value,  
press -VALUE+ up or down. The options are 1,000, 2,000, 5,000,  
10,000, and 20,000 pages.  
5
6
Once you have selected the page frequency, press SELECT to  
save the choice.  
Press ITEM once again until CLEANING PAGE SIZE=LETTER  
appears.  
You can choose to run the cleaning page on either Letter size or  
A4 size.  
7
Press -VALUE+ to select either A4 or Letter and then press  
SELECT to save your selection.  
92 Chapter 3 - Printer maintenance  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Performing preventative maintenance  
You should replace certain parts when the PERFORM PRINTER  
MAINTENANCEmessage appears on the printer control panel. This will  
help ensure that your printer maintains optimum performance.  
The maintenance message will appear every 200,000 pages. To  
check the number of pages the printer has printed, print either a  
configuration page or a supplies status page (see “Configuration  
page” on page 152 or “Supplies status page” on page 154 for details).  
To order the printer maintenance kit, see “Ordering information” on  
page 22. The kit includes:  
G
G
G
fuser  
rollers (transfer, pickup, and feed)  
instructions  
Note  
The printer maintenance kit is a consumable item and is not covered  
under warranty.  
EN  
Performing preventative maintenance 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring alerts  
You can use HP Web JetAdmin or the printer’s embedded web server  
to configure the system to alert you of problems with the printer. The  
alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account or  
accounts that you specify.  
You can configure the following:  
G
G
the device you want to monitor (in this case, the printer)  
what alerts are to be received (for example, alerts for paper jams,  
paper out, toner low, toner out, and cover open)  
G
the e-mail account to which the alerts should be forwarded  
For  
HP Web JetAdmin  
See the following  
G
“HP Web JetAdmin” on page 41 for general  
information about HP Web JetAdmin  
G
HP Web JetAdmin online help for details on  
alerts and how to set them up  
Embedded web server  
G
G
“Embedded web server” on page 251 for  
general information about the embedded  
web server  
Embedded web server online help for  
details on alerts and how to set them up  
94 Chapter 3 - Printer maintenance  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Problem solving  
4
Overview  
This chapter will help you to troubleshoot and solve printer problems.  
Clear paper jams  
Occasionally, paper can jam during printing. This section will help  
you to locate paper jams, properly clear them from the printer, and  
solve repeated paper jams.  
Understand  
printer messages  
Many different messages can appear on the printer control panel  
display. Some messages tell the printer’s current status, such as  
INITIALIZING. Other messages require an action, such as  
CLOSE TOP COVER. Many of these messages are self-explanatory.  
However, some messages indicate a problem with the printer, or  
request further action or description. This section lists these types  
of messages, and tells what to do if a message persists.  
Correct output  
quality problems  
The printer should produce print jobs of the highest quality. If print  
jobs do not look sharp and clear, defects such as lines, specks, or  
smears appear on the page, or paper is wrinkled or curled, use this  
section to troubleshoot and solve the output quality problem.  
Determine printer  
problems  
Before you can fix a printer problem, you must understand where  
the problem lies. Use the flowchart in this chapter to determine the  
printer problem, and then follow the corresponding troubleshooting  
suggestions.  
Check printer  
configuration  
From the printer, you can print information pages, which give details  
about the printer and its configuration.  
EN  
Overview 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Clearing paper jams  
If the printer control panel displays a paper jam message, look for  
paper in the locations indicated in the figure on the next page, then  
see the procedure for clearing the paper jam. You might need to look  
for paper in other locations than indicated in the paper jam message.  
If the location of the paper jam is not obvious, look first in the top  
cover area underneath the toner cartridge.  
When clearing paper jams, be very careful not to tear the paper. If a  
small piece of paper is left in the printer, it could cause additional  
jams. If paper jams are a recurring problem, see “Solving repeated  
paper jams” on page 110.  
Note  
The top cover of the printer must be opened and then closed to clear  
a paper jam message.  
96 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper jam locations  
Back  
Front  
5
6
1
2
4
3
1
Top cover and toner cartridge area  
Optional envelope feeder  
Input tray areas  
2
3
4
5
6
Optional duplexer  
Output areas (top and rear)  
Fuser area  
Note  
Loose toner might remain in the printer after a paper jam and cause  
output quality problems. These should clear up within a few pages.  
EN  
Clearing paper jams 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams from the top  
cover and toner cartridge  
areas  
1 Open the top cover and remove the  
toner cartridge.  
1
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the toner  
cartridge, do not expose it to light for  
more than a few minutes.  
2 Use the green handle to lift the  
paper access plate.  
2
3 Slowly pull the paper out of the  
printer. Do not tear the paper.  
Note  
If paper is difficult to remove, try  
clearing it from the input tray area (see  
“Clearing jams from the input tray  
areas” on page 102).  
3
Avoid spilling loose toner. Using a dry,  
lint-free cloth, clean any loose toner  
that might have fallen into the printer.  
If loose toner falls into the printer, it  
might cause temporary problems with  
print quality. Loose toner should clear  
from the paper path after a few pages  
are printed.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off  
with a dry cloth and wash clothing in  
cold water. (Hot water sets toner into  
fabric.)  
Continued on the next page.  
98 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
5
Open tray 1 and remove the  
entrance cover to check for  
additional jammed paper. If paper is  
present, remove it.  
4
Rotate the paper guide to check for  
additional jammed paper. If paper is  
present, remove it.  
6
7
8
Replace the entrance cover and  
close tray 1.  
5
Reinstall the toner cartridge and  
close the top cover.  
If a paper jam message persists,  
there is still paper in the printer. Look  
for paper in another location (see  
“Paper jam locations” on page 97).  
If you are using a non-HP toner  
cartridge, the message NON HP  
TONER DETECTEDmight appear on  
the control panel. Press GO to  
continue.  
6
7
EN  
Clearing paper jams 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams from the  
optional envelope feeder  
1
Remove any envelopes loaded in  
the envelope feeder. Lower the  
envelope weight and lift the tray  
extension up to the closed position.  
1
2
Press and hold the release button on  
the left side of the envelope feeder.  
Grasp both sides of the envelope  
feeder and carefully pull it out of the  
printer.  
2
3
4
Slowly remove any envelopes out of  
the envelope feeder and the printer.  
Insert the envelope feeder into the  
printer until it locks into place. (The  
connector on the top right side of the  
envelope feeder fits into the plug in  
the printer.) Pull gently on the  
envelope feeder to be sure that it is  
securely in place.  
3
Continued on the next page.  
4
100 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
6
Open and close the top cover to  
clear the paper jam message.  
5
If a paper jam message persists,  
there is still paper in the printer. Look  
for paper in another location (see  
“Paper jam locations” on page 97).  
7
Reload envelopes, making sure that  
you push the bottom envelopes in  
slightly further than the top  
envelopes (see “Loading envelopes  
in the envelope feeder” on page 59).  
EN  
Clearing paper jams 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams from the  
input tray areas  
Tray 1  
1
2
3
Slowly pull the paper out of the printer. If  
part of the paper has already been  
pulled into the printer, follow the steps  
under “Clearing jams from the top cover  
and toner cartridge areas” on page 98.  
Trays 2, 3, and 4  
For all other trays, follow the steps below  
(see “Clearing jams from the optional  
envelope feeder” on page 100 for  
clearing envelope feeder jams).  
1
Slide the tray out of the printer, and  
remove any damaged paper from  
the tray.  
2
If the edge of the paper is visible in  
the feed area, slowly pull the paper  
down and out of the printer. (Do not  
pull the paper straight out or it will  
tear.) If the paper is not visible, look  
in the top cover area (see “Clearing  
jams from the top cover and toner  
cartridge areas” on page 98).  
Note  
Do not force the paper if it will not move  
easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try  
removing it through the tray above (if  
applicable) or through the top cover  
area.  
3
Make sure the paper is flat in the tray  
at all four corners and below the  
front and back tabs.  
Continued on the next page.  
102 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Make sure that all three paper size  
adjustments are correct (see  
“Loading trays 2, 3, and 4” on  
page 47).  
5
5
6
Slide the tray back into the printer.  
Open and close the top cover to  
clear the paper jam message.  
7
If a paper jam message persists,  
there is still paper in the printer. Look  
for paper in another location (see  
“Paper jam locations” on page 97).  
6
EN  
Clearing paper jams 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams from the  
optional duplexer  
1
2
Open the duplexer’s rear door.  
1
Slowly pull any paper out of the  
duplexer.  
3
4
Remove the duplexer by lifting it  
slightly and pulling it out of the  
printer.  
From the rear of the printer, remove  
any paper on top of tray 2. (You  
might need to reach inside the  
printer.)  
2
Continued on the next page.  
3
4
104 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
6
Slowly pull any paper out of the  
duplexer.  
5
Turn the duplexer over and remove  
any paper.  
7
8
Insert the duplexer into the printer.  
Open and close the top cover to  
clear the paper jam message.  
9
If a paper jam message persists,  
there is still paper in the printer. Look  
for paper in another location (see  
“Paper jam locations” on page 97).  
6
7
8
EN  
Clearing paper jams 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams from the  
output areas  
Note  
1
If most of the paper is still inside the  
printer, it is best to remove it through the  
top cover area. See “Clearing jams from  
the top cover and toner cartridge areas”  
on page 98.  
1
2
Open the rear output bin.  
Grasp both sides of the paper, and  
slowly pull the paper out of the  
printer. (There might be loose toner  
on the paper. Be careful not to spill it  
on yourself or into the printer.)  
2
Note  
If paper is difficult to remove, try opening  
the top cover all the way to release  
pressure on the paper.  
3
If the paper has torn or you still cannot  
remove the paper, see “Clearing jams  
from the fuser area” on page 107.  
3
4
Close the rear output bin.  
Open and close the top cover to  
clear the paper jam message.  
5
If a paper jam message persists,  
there is still paper in the printer. Look  
for paper in another location (see  
“Paper jam locations” on page 97).  
4
106 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Clearing jams from the  
fuser area  
Use this procedure:  
1
G
G
1
when paper has jammed inside the  
fuser and cannot otherwise be  
removed  
when a page has torn while you  
were trying to clear a jam from the  
fuser  
Turn the printer off.  
2
WARNING!  
To avoid minor burns, wait 30 minutes for  
the fuser to cool before continuing with  
this procedure.  
2
Turn the printer so its rear cover  
faces you and remove the tray 2 dust  
cover or optional duplexer.  
3
3
4
Unplug the power cord from the  
printer.  
Open the rear output bin and pull the  
extension out.  
Continued on the next page.  
4
EN  
Clearing paper jams 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
Remove the rear output bin and  
extension. To do this, bend the  
middle down slightly, release tab 1  
and then release tab 2.  
5
6
7
1
6
7
Unlock the fuser by rotating the blue  
fuser levers so that they point up.  
2
Pull the fuser out of the printer. To  
release the fuser from the printer,  
hold the back of the printer while  
pulling on the fuser. Do not pull on  
the black plastic flapper.  
8
Remove the paper that has jammed.  
CAUTION  
Do not use a sharp object to clear paper  
from the fuser area. You might damage  
the fuser.  
Continued on the next page.  
8
108 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9
Replace the fuser, left side first. Be  
sure to push the fuser firmly into the  
printer.  
9
10 Lock the fuser in place by rotating  
the levers to the horizontal position.  
11 Replace the rear output bin, left side  
first.  
12 Plug the power cord into the printer.  
10  
13 Replace the tray 2 dust cover or the  
optional duplexer.  
14 Turn the printer back on.  
15 If a paper jam message persists,  
there is still paper in the printer. Look  
for paper in another location (see  
“Paper jam locations” on page 97).  
11  
Note  
Since the printer has been turned off,  
you will need to send the print job again.  
EN  
Clearing paper jams 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solving repeated paper jams  
If paper jams occur frequently, try the following:  
G
Check all the paper jam locations (see “Clearing paper jams” on  
page 96). A piece of paper might be stuck somewhere in the printer.  
Even a small torn piece of paper in the printer path can cause repeated  
jams.  
G
G
If using a duplexer, check all areas (including under the duplexer).  
Check that paper is correctly loaded in the trays, that all three  
adjustments have been made, and that the trays are not overfilled. Make  
sure paper is under the front and back tabs. (See the sections on loading  
paper, starting with “Loading tray 1” on page 46.)  
G
Check that all trays and paper handling accessories are completely  
inserted into the printer. (If a tray is opened during a print job, this might  
cause a paper jam.)  
G
G
G
Check that all covers and doors are closed. (If a cover or door is opened  
during a print job, this might cause a paper jam.)  
Try printing to a different output bin (see “Selecting the output bin” on  
page 44).  
The sheets might be sticking together. Try bending the stack to separate  
each sheet. Do not fan the stack.  
G
G
If you are printing from tray 1, try reducing the size of the stack.  
If printing from the envelope feeder, make sure it is loaded correctly,  
pushing the bottom envelopes in slightly farther than the top envelopes  
(see “Loading envelopes in the envelope feeder” on page 59).  
G
If you are printing small sizes, feed paper short edge first (see  
“Guidelines for printing custom-size paper” on page 63).  
G
G
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°.  
Check the characteristics of the media you are using. Use only paper  
that meets HP specifications (see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
Try using different paper to see if the problem goes away. Do not use  
curled, deformed, damaged, or irregular paper.  
G
Check that the environmental conditions for the printer are met (see  
“Environmental specifications” on page 201).  
G
G
Avoid using paper that has already been used in a printer or copier.  
Do not print on both sides of envelopes or transparencies (see “Printing  
envelopes” on page 55 or “Printing transparencies” on page 62).  
G
G
Print only on full sheets of labels and do not print on both sides of label  
sheets (see “Printing labels” on page 61).  
Check that the power supplied to the printer is steady and meets printer  
specifications (see “Electrical specifications” on page 201).  
G
G
Clean the printer (see “Cleaning the printer” on page 88).  
Perform preventative printer maintenance if maintenance is due (see  
“Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
110 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer messages  
The table in this section explains messages that might appear on the  
printer control panel. Printer messages and their meanings are listed  
in alphabetical order, with numbered messages following.  
If a message persists:  
G
If a message persists requesting that you load a tray, or if a  
message indicates that a previous print job is still in the printer’s  
memory, press GO to print or press CANCEL JOB to clear the job  
from the printer’s memory.  
G
If a message persists after performing all of the recommended  
actions, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider  
(see “HP Customer Care Service and Support” on page 157).  
Note  
Not all messages are described in this user guide (many are self-  
explanatory).  
Some printer messages are affected by the Auto Continue and  
Clearable Warning settings from the Configuration Menu in the printer  
control panel (see the description of “CLEARABLE WARNINGS=JOB” on  
page 220).  
Using the printer online help system  
This printer features an online help system on the control panel that  
provides instructions for resolving most printer errors. Certain control  
panel messages alternate with instructions on accessing the online  
help system.  
Whenever a ? appears in an error message or the message  
alternates with FOR HELP PRESS THE ? KEY, press the right side of  
the ITEM key to navigate through a sequence of instructions.  
Note  
To exit the online help system, press either GO or SELECT.  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printer messages  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
ACCESS DENIED  
MENUS LOCKED  
The printer control panel function you are trying to access has been  
locked to prevent unauthorized access.  
See your network administrator.  
The duplexer is not properly connected to the printer.  
BAD DUPLEXER  
CONNECTION  
Ensure that the right-angle power cord that shipped with the printer  
is being used.  
Try removing and reinstalling the duplexer. Then turn the printer off  
and back on.  
The envelope feeder is not connected properly to the printer.  
BAD ENV FEEDER  
CONNECTION  
Try removing and reinstalling the envelope feeder. Then turn the  
printer off and back on.  
There is a problem with an optional 500-sheet paper tray connection  
with the printer:  
BAD OPT TRAY  
CONNECTION  
• the tray is not connected properly  
• more than two optional 500-sheet paper trays have been installed  
(the printer cannot support more than four trays total)  
• the electronics in the paper tray are faulty  
Try removing and reinstalling the paper tray. Then turn the printer off  
and back on.  
The printer cannot duplex because the rear output bin is open.  
Close the rear output bin.  
CANNOT DUPLEX  
CLOSE REAR BIN  
The optional input tray cannot feed paper to the printer because a  
door or paper guide is open.  
CHECK INPUT  
DEVICE  
Check the doors and paper guides and close any that are open.  
alternates with  
PAPER PATH OPEN  
PLEASE CLOSE IT  
The optional output device is not properly connected to the printer. A  
proper connection must be made for printing to continue.  
CHECK OUTPUT  
DEVICE  
alternates with  
CLOSE OUTPUT  
DELIVERY PATH  
The engine is checking for possible paper jams or paper that was not  
cleared from the printer.  
CHECKING PAPER  
PATH  
The top cover is open and must be closed for printing to continue.  
CLOSE TOP COVER  
The EIO disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used.  
Remove the EIO disk and replace it with a new one.  
DISK DEVICE  
FAILURE  
112 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have  
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a  
non-existent directory.  
DISK FILE  
OPERATION FAILED  
Delete files from the EIO disk and then try again. Use HP Resource  
Manager to download or delete files and fonts. (See the software help  
for more information.)  
DISK FILE  
SYSTEM IS FULL  
The EIO disk is protected, and no new files can be written to it.  
Disable the write protection through HP Resource Manager.  
DISK IS  
WRITE PROTECTED  
The disk accessory in EIO slot [n]is initializing.  
EIO [n] DISK  
INITIALIZING  
The EIO disk is not working correctly.  
Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated by [n].  
Replace it with a new EIO disk.  
EIO [n] DISK  
NOT FUNCTIONAL  
Wait for the message to disappear (up to 5 minutes). If the printer EIO  
card is operating correctly and communicating with the network, this  
message disappears after approximately 1 minute and no action is  
required.  
EIO [n]  
INITIALIZING  
alternates with  
DO NOT POWER OFF  
If the EIO card is unable to communicate with the network, this  
message remains for 5 minutes and then disappears. In this case the  
printer is not communicating with the network (even though the  
message is no longer present). The problem may be a bad EIO card,  
a bad cable or connection on the network, or a network problem.  
Contact your network administrator.  
The disk accessory in EIO slot [n]is initializing.  
EIO [n] DISK  
SPINNING UP  
A job has been sent to the envelope feeder and it is empty.  
ENV FEEDER LOAD  
[TYPE] [SIZE]  
Load the correct size and type in the feeder. Pressing GO will prompt  
a question asking if you would rather print on another available size  
of envelope in the printer. Press -VALUE+ to scroll through the  
available types and sizes; press SELECT to accept an alternate type  
or size.  
Make sure the envelope size and type are set correctly from the Paper  
Handling Menu in the printer control panel (see “Paper Handling  
Menu” on page 210).  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
The printer is asking what size of envelopes has been loaded in the  
envelope feeder. In response, you can take either of the following  
actions:  
ENVELOPE FEEDER  
SIZE = [xxxxx]  
• press SELECT to accept the current envelope size  
• press -VALUE+ to change the size and then press SELECT to accept  
the new size  
If you do not press any buttons, the message disappears in about 1  
minute.  
Note  
Changing the size here changes the default for envelope size in the  
envelope feeder in the Paper Handling Menu (see the description of  
“ENVELOPE FEEDER SIZE=COM10” on page 210).  
The printer has received a job under the following conditions:  
ENVELOPE FEEDER  
TYPE = [xxxxx]  
• the envelope type requested by the job is not available in the printer  
• envelopes have just been placed in the envelope feeder (thus  
triggering the paper sensor)  
You can take either of the following actions:  
• press SELECT to accept the paper type and then press GO  
• press +VALUE- to change the type, press SELECT to accept the new  
type, and then press GO to continue  
When an external paper handling device is connected to the printer,  
it must initialize after the computer boots or after coming out of  
PowerSave mode.  
EXTERNAL DEVICE  
INITIALIZING  
The flash DIMM had a critical failure and no longer can be used.  
Remove the flash DIMM and replace it with a new one.  
FLASH DEVICE  
FAILURE  
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have  
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a  
non-existent directory.  
FLASH FILE  
OPERATION FAILED  
Delete files from the flash DIMM. Use HP Resource Manager to  
download or delete files and fonts. (See the software help for more  
information.)  
FLASH FILE  
SYSTEM IS FULL  
The flash DIMM is protected and no new files can be written to it.  
Disable the write protection through HP Resource Manager.  
FLASH IS  
WRITE PROTECTED  
114 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
An input paper handling device has a condition that needs attention  
before printing can resume.  
INPUT DEVICE  
CONDITION  
[xx.yy]  
Turn the printer off.  
Disconnect the cable to the input paper handling devices and then  
reconnect it.  
Turn the printer on.  
See the documentation that came with the paper handling device for  
assistance.  
The toner cartridge has been removed and must be reinstalled for  
printing to continue.  
INSTALL TONER  
CARTRIDGE  
The specified tray is not installed and must be inserted and closed  
for printing to continue.  
INSTALL TRAY [x]  
Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer’s file system. At  
bootup time, these entities are loaded into RAM. (These entities can  
take a long time to load into RAM depending on the size and number  
of entities being loaded.) The <number>specifies a sequence  
number indicating the current program being loaded.  
LOADING  
PROGRAM <number>  
alternates with  
DO NOT POWER OFF  
Load the requested paper into tray 1.  
MANUALLY FEED  
[TYPE] [SIZE]  
Press GO if the desired paper is already loaded in tray 1.  
There is no available memory in the printer. The current job might not  
print correctly and some resources (such as downloaded fonts or  
macros) might have been deleted.  
MEMORY FULL  
STORED DATA LOST  
Consider adding more memory to the printer (see “Printer memory  
and expansion” on page 229).  
The printer changed its memory settings because it did not have  
enough memory to use the previous settings for I/O Buffering and  
Resource Saving. This usually occurs after removing memory from  
the printer, adding a duplexer, or adding a printer language.  
MEMORY SETTINGS  
CHANGED  
Consider adding more memory to the printer (see “Printer memory  
and expansion” on page 229).  
The printer did not have enough free memory to print the entire job.  
The remainder of the job will not print and will be cleared from  
memory.  
MEMORY SHORTAGE  
JOB CLEARED  
Press GO to continue.  
Consider adding more memory to the printer (see “Printer memory  
and expansion” on page 229).  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
The printer had to compress the job in order to fit it in available  
memory. Some data loss might have occurred.  
MEMORY SHORTAGE  
PAGE SIMPLIFIED  
Press GO to continue.  
The print quality of these pages may not be acceptable. Reduce the  
complexity of these pages and reprint them.  
Consider adding more memory to the printer (see “Printer memory  
and expansion” on page 229).  
The printer has detected that the toner cartridge is not a genuine HP  
toner cartridge. If you believe you purchased an HP toner cartridge,  
call the HP fraud hotline (see “HP fraud hotline” on page 161). Any  
printer repair required as a result of using non-HP toner is not covered  
under the printer warranty.  
NON HP TONER  
DETECTED  
alternates with  
PRESS GO TO  
CONTINUE  
Press GO to place the printer online.  
OFFLINE  
The output bin is full and needs to be emptied.  
OUTPUT BIN FULL  
alternates with  
CLEAR PAPER FROM  
[BINNAME  
]
Turn the printer off to keep the paper from wrapping more firmly  
around the fuser. Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge.  
Remove all visible paper. If you cannot locate the paper, leave printer  
turned off and remove the fuser to remove paper (see “Clearing jams  
from the fuser area” on page 107).  
PAPER WRAPPED  
AROUND FUSER  
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer prompts you to perform  
routine maintenance every 200,000 pages. (To order a printer  
maintenance kit, see “Ordering information” on page 22. For  
information on maintenance, see “Performing preventative  
maintenance” page 93.)  
PERFORM PRINTER  
MAINTENANCE  
A print job requested a printer language that does not exist in the  
printer. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.  
PRINTER LANGUAGE  
NOT AVAILABLE  
Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add the  
requested language to the printer (if available).  
Press GO to continue.  
The printer is conducting the auto cleaning page process. This can  
take up to 2.5 minutes.  
PROCESSING AUTO  
CLEANING PAGE  
The printer is conducting the manual cleaning page process. This can  
take up to 2.5 minutes.  
PROCESSING  
CLEANING PAGE  
The RAM disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used.  
RAM DISK DEVICE  
FAILURE  
116 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have  
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a  
non-existent directory.  
RAM DISK FILE  
OPERATION FAILED  
Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off, and then turn  
the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Delete files using HP  
ResourceManageroranothersoftwareutility. Seethesoftwareonline  
help for more information.)  
RAM DISK FILE  
SYSTEM IS FULL  
If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk. Change  
the RAM disk size from the Configuration Menu in the printer control  
panel (see the description of the RAM disk menu items in  
“Configuration Menu” on page 219). HP Resource Manager can also  
be used to increase/decrease the RAM disk size.  
The message first appears when about 15% of the toner is remaining  
in the toner cartridge (about 1,500 pages remaining for the 10,000-  
page cartridge and about 900 pages remaining for the 6,000-page  
cartridge at 5% coverage). Depending on how the printer has been  
configured, it will either continue to print or stop.  
TONER LOW  
If the printer has stopped, you can resume printing by pressing GO  
for each job.  
You might want to ensure that you have a replacement toner cartridge  
on hand.  
See “Toner low and toner out conditions” on page 87 for information  
on how to configure the printer’s response to toner messages.  
Thetonercartridgehasrunoutoftoner. Dependingonhowtheprinter  
has been configured, it will either continue to print or stop.  
TONER OUT  
If the printer has stopped, you can resume printing by pressing GO  
for each job.  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
See “Toner low and toner out conditions” on page 87 for details on  
how to configure the printer’s response to toner messages.  
Load paper in the empty tray (x) to clear the message.  
TRAY [x] EMPTY  
[TYPE] [SIZE]  
If you do not load the specified tray, the printer will continue printing  
from the next tray with the same paper size and type, and the  
message will continue to appear.  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
This message occurs for the following reasons:  
TRAY 1 LOAD  
[TYPE] [SIZE]  
• tray 1 was requested from the application, but the tray is empty  
• the printer cannot find the requested size of paper in the printer  
If the correct paper size is loaded, the adjustments to the tray have  
not been set correctly, either in the control panel or on the tray itself.  
To set the type at the control panel, see the descriptions of TRAY 1  
TYPEin “Paper Handling Menu” on page 210. To set adjustments on  
the tray, see “Loading tray 1” on page 46.  
Load the requested paper into tray 1, or press SELECT to override the  
message and print on a loaded paper size.  
If printing does not continue, press GO.  
If you are trying to print A4- or letter-size paper and this message  
appears, make sure the default paper size is set correctly from the  
Printing Menu in the printer control panel and also in the software  
program (see the description of PAPER SIZEin “Printing Menu” on  
page 213).  
Press GO to print from the next available tray.  
Press -VALUE+ to scroll through the available types and sizes.  
Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.  
Note  
If custom size is being used, another line appears in the message  
giving the x and y dimensions of the paper.  
TRAY [x] LOAD  
[TYPE] [SIZE]  
where xis tray 2, 3,  
or 4  
This message occurs for the following reasons:  
• tray 2, 3, or 4 was requested, but the tray is empty  
• tray 2, 3, or 4 was requested, but the adjustments are not set for  
the requested type or size  
Make sure that all three paper size adjustments have been made (see  
the explanation of adjustments in “Loading trays 2, 3, and 4” on  
page 47). Also make sure that the type has been set at the control  
panel (see the descriptions of TRAY 2 TYPE, TRAY 3 TYPE, and  
TRAY 4 TYPEin the “Paper Handling Menu” on page 210).  
Load the requested paper into the indicated tray, or press SELECT to  
override the message and print on a loaded paper size.  
If printing does not continue, press GO.  
If you are trying to print A4- or letter-size paper and this message  
appears, make sure the default paper size is set correctly in the  
Printing Menu at the printer control panel and also in the software  
program (see the description of PAPER SIZEin “Printing Menu” on  
page 213).  
Press GO to print from the next available tray.  
Press -VALUE+ to scroll through the available types and sizes.  
Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.  
118 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
The printer is asking what size of paper has been loaded in tray 1. In  
response, you can take either of the following actions:  
TRAY 1 SIZE =  
[xxxx]  
• press SELECT to accept the current paper size  
• press -VALUE+ to change the size and then press SELECT to accept  
the new size  
The printer will first display the TRAY 1 TYPE=xxxxmessage (see  
the description of that message). If you do not press any buttons in  
the timeout period (about 1 minute), it displays this TRAY 1 SIZE=  
xxxx message).  
Note  
Changing the size here changes the default for tray 1 paper size in  
the Paper Handling Menu (see the description of “TRAY 1 SIZE=  
LETTER” on page 210).  
The printer has received a job under the three following conditions:  
• the paper type requested by the job is not available in the printer  
• tray 1 has been set for CASSETTE  
TRAY 1 TYPE =  
[xxxx]  
• paper has been placed in tray 1 (thus triggering tray 1’s paper  
sensor)  
If you do press any buttons, the message disappears in about 1  
minute. You can take either of the following actions:  
• press SELECT to accept the paper type  
• press -VALUE+ to change the type and then press SELECT to accept  
the new type  
Note  
Changing the type here changes the default for tray 1 paper type in  
the Paper Handling Menu (see the description of “TRAY 1 TYPE=  
PLAIN” on page 211).  
If you do not do anything during the timeout period (about 1 minute),  
theprinterwillprintonthepaperintray1. Itwillalsochangethedefault  
for tray 1 paper type in the Paper Handling Menuto the type requested  
by the application that sent the job.  
Memory or file system failures would not allow a mopy job to occur.  
Only one copy will be produced.  
UNABLE TO  
MOPY JOB  
An external paper handling device detected an unsupported paper  
size. The printer will go offline until the condition is corrected.  
UNSUPPORTED SIZE  
IN TRAY [yy]  
If the requested paper size or type is not available, the printer asks if  
it should use another paper size or type instead.  
USE [TYPE]  
[SIZE] INSTEAD?  
Press -VALUE+ to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press  
SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
The RAM disk setting has been changed from the printer control  
panel. This change will not take effect until the printer reinitializes.  
WAIT FOR PRINTER  
TO REINITIALIZE  
If you change the mode of the external device, turn the printer off,  
turn the printer on and wait for the printer to reinitialize.  
A printer error has occurred that can be cleared by pressing GO in  
the printer control panel.  
xx.yy  
PRINTER ERROR  
PRESS GO TO  
CONTINUE  
Paper has either jammed in the printer or has been caught in a  
paper tray.  
13.x PAPER JAM  
[LOCATION]  
1. Open the top cover or tray indicated by the message.  
2. Clear all paper from the area. If necessary, remove  
the toner cartridge, duplexer, or paper trays.  
3. If the message persists, check for paper in all other  
areas.  
Caution  
Ensure that all jammed paper is removed before closing the cover or  
tray.  
Open and close the top cover to clear the message.  
See “Clearing paper jams” on page 96 for more detailed  
information.  
The printer received more data than can fit in its available memory.  
You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or  
complex graphics.  
20 INSUFFICIENT  
MEMORY  
alternates with  
Press GO to print the transferred data (some data might be lost), then  
simplify the print job or install additional memory (see “Printer  
memory and expansion” on page 229).  
PRESS GO TO  
CONTINUE  
The data (dense text, rules, raster or vector graphics) sent to the  
printer was too complex.  
21 PAGE TOO  
COMPLEX  
Press GO to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)  
alternates with  
PRESS GO TO  
CONTINUE  
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An  
22 EIO x  
improper communications protocol may be in use.  
BUFFER OVERFLOW  
Press GO to clear the message. (Data will be lost.)  
Check the host configuration.  
alternates with  
PRESS GO TO  
CONTINUE  
120 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
Too much data was sent to the parallel port.  
22 PARALLEL I/O  
BUFFER OVERFLOW  
Check for a loose cable connection and be sure to use a high-quality  
cable (see “Ordering information” on page 22). (Some non-HP  
parallel cables might be missing pin connections or might otherwise  
not conform to the IEEE-1284 specification.)  
alternates with  
PRESS GO TO  
CONTINUE  
This error can occur if the driver you are using is not IEEE-1284  
compliant. Forbestresults, useanHPdriverthatcamewiththeprinter  
(see “Printer drivers” on page 35).  
Press GO to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)  
The connection has been broken between the printer and the EIO  
card in the specified slot. (Data loss might occur in this situation.)  
40 EIO [x] BAD  
TRANSMISSION  
Press GO to clear the error message and continue printing.  
alternates with  
PRESS GO TO  
CONTINUE  
The printer detected a paper size different than what it was expecting.  
This is typically caused if two or more sheets stick together in the  
printer or if the paper tray is not properly adjusted.  
41.3 UNEXPECTED  
PAPER SIZE  
alternates with  
EXPECTED  
Reload the tray with the correct paper size.  
Ensure that paper in the tray is loaded under the front and back tabs.  
[TYPE] [SIZE]  
If you are printing from tray 1, verify that the correct paper size is  
selected in the control panel (see “Paper Handling Menu” on  
page 210).  
If you are printing from tray 2, 3, or 4, verify that the three paper size  
adjustments on the paper tray have been made correctly (see the  
description of adjustments in “Loading trays 2, 3, and 4” on page 47).  
After performing the actions above, press GO. The page containing  
the error will automatically be reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.  
(Or, you might want to press CANCEL JOB to clear the job from the  
printer’s memory.)  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
41.x  
PRINTER ERROR  
Press GO. The page containing the error will automatically be  
reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.  
alternates with  
If the error does not clear, turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
49.xx  
PRINTER ERROR  
Press GO. The page containing the error will automatically be  
reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.  
alternates with  
If the error does not clear, turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
A fusing error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on.  
50.x  
FUSER ERROR  
There is a problem with the power supply.  
50.4  
PRINTER ERROR  
Remove the printer from any UPS supplies, additional power  
supplies, or power strips. Plug the printer into a wall outlet and see if  
this resolves the problem.  
alternates with  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
If the printer is already plugged into a wall outlet, try another power  
source in the building that is independent of the one currently being  
used.  
The line voltage and current source at the printer location might need  
to be inspected to ensure that it meets the printer’s electrical  
specifications (see “Electrical specifications” on page 201).  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
51.x or 52.x  
PRINTER ERROR  
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
alternates with  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The DIMM that caused  
the error will not be used. Values of x, y, and zzare as follows:  
53.xy.zz  
PRINTER ERROR  
x = DIMM type  
0 = ROM  
1 = RAM  
y = Device location  
0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM)  
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3  
zz = Error number  
You might need to replace the specified DIMM.  
Turn the printer off, and then replace the DIMM that caused the error.  
The toner cartridge has been installed without removing the sealing  
tape.  
54.1 REMOVE  
SEALING TAPE  
Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge. Pull the sealing  
tape tab to remove the strip. Reinstall the toner cartridge and close  
the top cover.  
alternates with  
FROM TONER  
CARTRIDGE  
122 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
55.xx  
PRINTER ERROR  
Press GO. The page containing the error will automatically be  
reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.  
alternates with  
If the error does not clear, turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
56.x  
PRINTER ERROR  
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
alternates with  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
57.x  
PRINTER ERROR  
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
alternates with  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
58.x  
PRINTER ERROR  
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
alternates with  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
59.x  
PRINTER ERROR  
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.  
alternates with  
CYCLE POWER TO  
CONTINUE  
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The xvalue refers to  
62.x  
the location of the problem:  
PRINTER ERROR  
0 = Internal memory  
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3  
You might need to replace the specified DIMM.  
A temporary printing error occurred.  
64  
PRINTER ERROR  
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.  
alternates with  
CYCLE POWER  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
An error occurred in an external paper handling device.  
Turn the printer off.  
66.xx.xx  
SERVICE ERROR  
Disconnectthecablestoallexternalpaperhandlingdevices, andthen  
reconnect them.  
alternates with  
CHECK CABLES AND  
CYCLE POWER  
Turn the printer on.  
An error occurred in the printer’s permanent storage and one or more  
printer settings has been reset to its factory default.  
68.X PERMANENT  
STORAGE ERROR  
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine  
which values have changed (see “Configuration page” on page 152).  
alternates with  
CHECK SETTINGS  
The printer’s permanent storage is full. Some settings might have  
been reset to the factory defaults.  
68.x PERMANENT  
STORAGE FULL  
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine  
which values have changed (see “Configuration page” on page 152).  
Hold down CANCEL JOB while turning the printer on. This will clean up  
the permanent storage by removing old areas that are not being used.  
The printer detected an error.  
79 SERVICE [xxxx]  
Press CANCEL JOB to clear the print job from the printer memory. Turn  
the printer off, and then turn the printer on.  
Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job prints,  
go back to the first application and try printing a different file. (If the  
message only appears with a certain software application or print job,  
contact the software vendor for assistance.)  
If the message persists with different software applications and print  
jobs, disconnect all cables to the printer that connect it to the network  
or printer. Turn the printer off. Remove all memory DIMMs or third-  
party DIMMs from the printer (see “Installing memory” on page 230).  
Remove all EIO devices from the printer (see “Installing EIO cards/  
mass storage” on page 233). Turn the printer on. If the error no longer  
exists, install each DIMM and EIO device one at a time, making sure  
to turn the printer off and back on as you install each device. Replace  
a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error.  
Remember to reconnect all cables that connect the printer to the  
network or computer.  
124 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer messages (continued)  
Message  
Explanation or recommended action  
The EIO accessory in slot [z] has encountered a critical error. [z]  
8x.yyyy  
description:  
EIO [z] ERROR  
1 = EIO slot 1 - The printer detected an error with the EIO  
accessory.  
2 = EIO slot 2 - The printer detected an error with the EIO  
accessory.  
6 = EIO slot 1 - The EIO accessory detected an error. The EIO  
accessory may be defective.  
7 = EIO slot 2 - The EIO accessory detected an error. The EIO  
accessory may be defective.  
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.  
Turn the printer off, reseat the EIO accessory in slot [z], and then  
turn the printer on.  
Turn the printer off, remove the EIO accessory from slot [z], install  
it in a different EIO slot, and then turn the printer on.  
Replace the EIO accessory in slot [z].  
EN  
Understanding printer messages 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mopy disk error messages  
The following table lists the disk mopy (multiple original copy) error  
numbers reported on either the Printer Collation or Job Storage Disk  
Error page, which is printed when an error exists. Use the  
HP Resource Manager for management of the disk (see “HP  
Resource Manager”on page 37).  
Mopy disk error messages  
Disk  
error  
Error description  
Solution  
number  
1
Disk volume not present – it  
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk accessory.  
may be uninitialized.  
If problem persists, replace the hard drive.  
• RAM disk: Turn the printer off and then on  
again.  
3
5
6
A file or directory asked for  
could not be found.  
• Possible data corruption. Delete the job that  
prompted the error.  
Invalid # of bytes given in a  
read/write request.  
• Possible data corruption. Delete the job that  
prompted the error.  
Attempt to create a file or  
directory that already exists.  
• The user has sent a username that is the  
same as an existing directory. Change the  
username in the driver and resend the job.  
15  
16  
23  
Bad Disk  
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk accessory.  
If problem persists, replace the hard drive.  
No volume label  
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk accessory.  
If problem persists, replace the hard drive.  
Bad seek request – the  
resulting offset would be  
negative.  
• Possible data corruption. Delete the job that  
prompted the error.  
24  
Unexpected internal error  
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the  
error occurred with.  
• Disk media problem – initialize the hard disk  
accessory or reboot to reinit the RAM disk.  
• If the problem persists on a hard drive,  
replace the hard drive.  
126 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Mopy disk error messages (continued)  
Disk  
error  
Error description  
Solution  
number  
55  
Bad file system  
• Possible data corruption. Delete the job that  
prompted the error.  
• Disk media problem – initialize the hard disk  
accessory or reboot to reinit the RAM disk.  
• If the problem persists on a hard drive,  
replace the hard drive.  
56  
59  
Hardware failure  
• Replace the hard drive.  
The maximum number of  
directories has been reached  
Thereisamaximumnumberofdirectoriesthat  
can be put on a disk. Stored jobs are stored in  
directories created for each user. To solve this  
problem:  
• Delete all jobs stored for a user. The  
firmware will automatically delete the  
directory for a user with no stored jobs.  
• Delete other directories on the disk.  
70  
Disk Error  
• Contact your HP Service and Support  
Representative.  
EN  
Mopy disk error messages 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Correcting output quality problems  
This section of the manual helps you define print quality problems  
and what to do to correct them. Often output quality problems can be  
handled quite easily by making sure that your printer is properly  
maintained, using media that meets HP specifications, or running a  
cleaning page.  
Use the examples in the image defect table starting on this page to  
determine which output quality problem you are experiencing, then  
see the corresponding reference pages to troubleshoot. These  
examples consist of the most common methods to remedy print  
quality problems. If you still have problems after trying the suggested  
remedies, contact HP Customer Care Service and Support (see  
“Service and support” on page 157).  
Note  
The examples below depict letter-size paper that has passed through  
the printer short-edge first.  
Image defect table  
See “Light print  
(partial page)”  
on page 130  
See “Light print  
(entire page)” on  
page 130  
See “Specks”  
on page 130  
See “Specks”  
on page 130  
See “Dropouts” on See “Dropouts” on See “Dropouts” on See “Lines”  
page 131 page 131 page 131 on page 131  
128 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Image defect table (continued)  
See “Gray  
See “Toner smear” See “Loose toner” See “Repeating  
background”  
on page 132  
on page 132  
on page 132  
defects” on  
page 133  
See “Repeating  
See “Misformed  
See “Page skew”  
See “Curl or wave”  
image” on page 134 characters”  
on page 134  
on page 135  
on page 134  
See “Wrinkles or  
creases” on  
page 135  
See “Vertical white See “Tire tracks” on See “White spots on  
lines” on page 135 page 136 black” on page 136  
EN  
Correcting output quality problems 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Light print (partial page)  
1
2
The toner cartridge might be low. Replace the toner cartridge.  
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the  
supplies status page (see “Supplies status page” on page 154). If  
maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit  
(see “Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
3
The toner cartridge might be almost empty. Replace the toner  
cartridge.  
Light print (entire page)  
1
Make sure that EconoMode is turned off (see ECONOMODEin “Print  
Quality Menu” on page 217).  
2
At the printer control panel, use the Print Quality Menu to  
increase the toner density setting (see TONER DENSITYin “Print  
Quality Menu” on page 217)).  
3
4
Try using a different type of paper.  
The toner cartridge might be almost empty. Replace the toner  
cartridge.  
Specks  
Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared.  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
If specks occur frequently, set your printer up to automatically run  
a cleaning page (see “Running the cleaning page automatically”  
on page 92).  
3
Clean the inside of the printer (see “Cleaning the printer”  
on page 88) and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser  
(see “Running the cleaning page manually” on page 91).  
4
5
Try using a different type of paper.  
Check for toner cartridge leaks. If the toner cartridge is leaking,  
replace it.  
130 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dropouts  
1
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “General specifications” on page 202).  
2
If the paper is rough and the toner easily rubs off, either try  
changing the fuser mode to High 1 or High 2 (see “Paper  
Handling Menu” on page 210), or try using a smoother paper.  
3
Try changing to a different paper type.  
Lines  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Clean the inside of the printer (see “Cleaning the printer”  
on page 88) and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser  
(see “Running the cleaning page manually” on page 91).  
3
4
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the  
supplies status page (see “Supplies status page” on page 154). If  
maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit  
(see “Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
EN  
Correcting output quality problems 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Gray background  
1
2
3
Do not use paper that has already been run through the printer.  
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper  
180°.  
4
At the printer control panel, use the Print Quality Menu to  
decrease the toner density setting (see the description of TONER  
DENSITYin “Print Quality Menu” on page 217).  
5
6
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “General specifications” on page 202).  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Toner smear  
Also see “Loose toner” on page 133.  
1
2
3
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Try using a different type of paper.  
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “General specifications” on page 202).  
4
5
Clean the inside of the printer (see “Cleaning the printer”  
on page 88) and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser  
(see “Running the cleaning page manually” on page 91).  
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the  
supplies status page (see “Supplies status page” on page 154). If  
maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit  
(see “Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
6
Replace the toner cartridge.  
132 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Loose toner  
Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off  
the page.  
1
If paper is heavy or rough, try using a high fuser mode so that  
toner fuses more completely onto the paper. At the printer control  
panel, use CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENUin the Paper Handling  
Menu. To do this (see “Paper Handling Menu” on page 210).  
2
3
4
5
If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper,  
try printing on the non-rough side.  
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “Printer specifications” on page 200).  
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications  
(see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the  
supplies status page (see “Supplies status page” on page 154). If  
maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit  
(see “Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
Repeating defects  
See also “Repeating image” on page 134.  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
If the distance between defects is 38 mm (1.5 in) or 94 mm  
(3.76 in), the toner cartridge might need to be replaced.  
3
4
Clean the inside of the printer (see “Cleaning the printer”  
on page 88) and run a manual cleaning page to clean the fuser  
(see “Running the cleaning page manually” on page 91).  
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the  
supplies status page (see “Supplies status page” on page 154). If  
maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit  
(see “Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
EN  
Correcting output quality problems 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Repeating image  
This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a  
large quantity of narrow media.  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications  
(see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
3
4
If you observe that this type of defect occurs on wide paper (such  
as letter- or A4-size paper) just after printing on narrow media  
(such as envelopes), you can set SMALL PAPER SPEEDon the  
Paper Handling Menu to SLOW(see “Paper Handling Menu” on  
page 210). Note that this will slow down printing.  
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the  
supplies status page (see “Supplies status page” on page 154). If  
maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit  
(see “Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
Misformed characters  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “General specifications” on page 202).  
3
Maintenance might be due. Check this by printing a copy of the  
supplies status page (see “Supplies status page” on page 154). If  
maintenance is due, order and install the printer maintenance kit  
(see “Performing preventative maintenance” on page 93).  
Page skew  
1
2
3
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Verify that there are no torn pieces of paper inside the printer.  
Make sure that paper is loaded correctly, all adjustments have  
been made, and the paper is under the corner tabs (see “Loading  
tray 1” on page 46 and “Loading trays 2, 3, and 4” on page 47).  
4
5
6
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper  
180°.  
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications  
(see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “General specifications” on page 202).  
134 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Curl or wave  
1
2
3
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper  
180°.  
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications  
(see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “Printer specifications” on page 200).  
4
5
Try printing to a different output bin.  
If media is lightweight and smooth, try using a low fuser mode to  
reduce the heat in the fusing process. At the printer control panel,  
use CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENUon the Paper Handling Menu  
to do this (see “Paper Handling Menu” on page 210).  
Wrinkles or creases  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “General specifications” on page 202).  
3
4
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper  
180°.  
Make sure that paper is loaded correctly, all adjustments have  
been made, and the paper is under the corner tabs (see “Loading  
tray 1” on page 46 and “Loading trays 2, 3, and 4” on page 47).  
5
6
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications  
(see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie  
flat.  
Vertical white lines  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications  
(see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
3
Replace the toner cartridge.  
EN  
Correcting output quality problems 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Tire tracks  
This defect typically occurs when the toner cartridge has far  
exceeded its rated usage of 10,000 pages (for example, printing a  
very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage).  
1
2
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner  
coverage.  
3
Use the 6,000-page cartridge if you cannot reduce the number of  
pages with very little toner coverage (part number C8061A).  
White spots on black  
1
2
Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself.  
Make sure that paper type and quality meet HP specifications  
(see “Paper specifications” on page 188).  
3
4
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the printer are  
being met (see “General specifications” on page 202).  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
136 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Determining printer problems  
Troubleshooting flowchart  
If the printer is not responding properly, use the flowchart to  
determine the problem. If the printer does not pass a step, follow the  
corresponding troubleshooting suggestions.  
If you cannot resolve the problem after following the suggestions in  
this guide, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider (see  
“HP Customer Care Service and Support” on page 157).  
Note  
Macintosh users: For more troubleshooting information, see  
“Troubleshooting flowchart for Macintosh users” on page 143.  
YES G  
1 Does the control panel display READY?  
NO  
Go to step 2.  
The display is  
blank and the  
printer’s fan is  
off.  
The display is The display is The display  
blank but the in the wrong shows  
A message  
other than  
READYis  
printer’s fan is language.  
garbled or  
unfamiliar  
characters.  
on.  
displayed.  
• Check the power • Press any  
• Turn the  
printer off.  
Hold down  
SELECT while  
turning the  
printer on.  
Press  
-VALUE+ to  
scroll through  
the available  
languages.  
Press SELECT  
to save the  
desired  
• Make sure the • Go to  
cord connections  
and the power  
switch.  
• Plug the printer  
into a different  
outlet.  
• Check that the  
power supplied to  
the printer is  
control panel  
key to see if the  
printer  
desired  
“Understanding  
printer  
messages” on  
page 111.  
language is  
selected from  
the control  
panel.  
responds.  
• Tur n the printer  
off, and then  
turn the printer  
on.  
• Tur n the  
printer off, and  
then turn the  
printer on.  
steady, and  
meets printer  
specifications  
(see “Electrical  
specifications”on  
page 201).  
language as  
the new  
default. Press  
GO to return to  
READY.  
EN  
Determining printer problems 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
YES G  
Go to step 3.  
2 Can you print a configuration page (see  
“Configuration page” on page 152)?  
NO  
A configuration page does A blank page prints. A message other than  
not print.  
READYor PRINTING  
CONFIGURATIONis displayed.  
• Checkthatalltraysareproperly • Check that the sealing • Go to “Understanding printer  
loaded, adjusted, and installed  
in the printer.  
• From the computer, check the  
print queue or print spooler to  
see if the printer has been  
paused. If there are problems  
tape is not still in the  
tonercartridge. (Seethe  
getting started guide or  
the instructions that  
came with the toner  
cartridge.)  
messages” on page 111.  
with the current print job, or if • The toner cartridge  
the printer is paused, a  
configurationpagewillnotprint.  
(PressCANCEL JOB andtrystep  
2 again.)  
might be empty. Install a  
new toner cartridge.  
138 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Go to step 4.  
YES G  
3 Can you print from a software application?  
NO  
The job will not print.  
A PS error page or list of  
commands prints  
• If the job will not print, and a message is displayed • The printer might have received a  
on the control panel, see “Understanding printer  
messages” on page 111.  
• From the computer, check to see if the printer has  
been paused.  
• If the printer is on a network, check that you are  
printing to the correct printer. To verify that it is not  
a network problem, connect the computer directly to  
the printer with a parallel cable, change the port to  
LPT1, and try to print.  
• Check the interface cable connections. Disconnect  
and reconnect the cable at the computer and the  
printer.  
• Test the cable by trying it on another computer.  
• If you are using a parallel connection, make sure the  
cable is IEEE-1284 compliant.  
• If the printer is on a network, print a configuration  
page (see “Configuration page” on page 152) and  
verify in the Protocol Information that server and  
node name match the names in the printer driver.  
• To verify that it is not a computer problem, print from  
another computer (if possible).  
nonstandard PS code. From the  
Configuration Menu in the printer  
control panel, set PERSONALITY  
to PSfor this print job only. After  
the job has printed, return the  
setting to AUTO(see  
“PERSONALITY= AUTO” on  
page 221).  
• Make sure the print job is a PS  
job, and that you are using the PS  
driver.  
• The printer might have received  
PS code when it is set to PCL.  
FromtheConfigurationMenu, set  
PERSONALITY to AUTO (see  
“PERSONALITY= AUTO” on  
page 221).  
• Make sure the print job is being sent to the correct  
port (LPT1, or network printer port, for example).  
• Check that you are using the proper printer driver  
(see “Choose the right printer driver for your needs”  
on page 37).  
• Reinstall the printer driver (see the getting started  
guide).  
• Check that the port is configured and working  
properly. (Try connecting another printer to that port  
and printing.)  
• If printing with the PS driver, from the Configuration  
Menu in the printer control panel, set PRINT PS  
ERRORS=ON, then print the job again (see “PRINT PS  
ERRORS= OFF” on page 221. If an error page prints,  
see the instructions in the next column.  
• From the Configuration Menu in the printer control  
panel, make sure that PERSONALITY=AUTO(see  
“PERSONALITY= AUTO” on page 221).  
• You might be missing a printer message that could  
help you solve the problem. From the Configuration  
Menu in the printer control panel, temporarily turn  
the Clearable Warnings and Auto Continue settings  
off (see “CLEARABLE WARNINGS=JOB” on page 220  
and “AUTO CONTINUE= ON” on page 220) and then  
print the job again.  
EN  
Determining printer problems 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Does the job print as expected? (Continued on the following page.)  
NO  
Print is garbled or only a  
portion of the page prints  
Printing  
Print speed is  
slower than  
expected.  
A control  
stops in the  
middle of  
the job.  
panel setting  
is not taking  
effect.  
• Check that you are using the  
proper printer driver (see  
“Choosetherightprinterdriverfor  
your needs” on page 37).  
• The data file sent to the printer  
might be corrupt. To test, try  
printing it on another printer (if  
possible), or try a different file.  
• Check the interface cable  
connections. Test the cable by  
trying it on another computer (if  
possible).  
• CANCEL JOB  
mighthavebeen  
pressed.  
• Check that the  
power supplied  
to the printer is  
steady, and  
meets printer  
specifications  
(see “Electrical  
specifications”  
on page 201).  
• Simplify the print • Check settings  
job.  
in the printer  
driver or  
software  
application.  
(Printer driver  
and software  
commands  
override control  
panel settings.)  
• Add more  
memory to the  
printer (see  
“Printer memory  
and expansion”  
on page 229).  
• Turn banner  
pages off. (See  
your network  
administrator.)  
• Note that slower  
speeds should  
be expected if  
you are printing  
narrow paper,  
printing from  
tray 1, using  
HIGH 2 fuser  
mode, or have  
small paper  
• Replace the interface cable with  
a high-quality cable (see  
“Ordering information” on  
page 22).  
• Reduce the job’s complexity, print  
at a lower resolution (see the  
description of “RESOLUTION=  
FASTRES 1200” on page 217), or  
install more printer memory (see  
“Printer memory and expansion”  
on page 229).  
• You might be missing a printer  
message that could help you  
solve the problem. From the  
Configuration Menu in the printer  
controlpanel,temporarilyturnthe  
Clearable Warnings and Auto  
Continue settings off (see  
“CLEARABLE WARNINGS=JOB” on  
page 220 and “AUTO CONTINUE=  
ON” on page 220) and then print  
the job again.  
speed set to  
slow.  
140 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Does the job print as expected? (continued)  
YES G  
Go to step 5.  
NO  
The print job is not formatted Pages are not fed correctly There are print  
correctly.  
or are damaged.  
quality problems.  
• Check that you are using the  
proper printer driver (see  
“Choosetherightprinterdriverfor  
your needs” on page 37).  
• Make sure paper is loaded  
correctlyandthattheguidesare  
not too tight or too loose against  
the paper stack.  
• Adjust the print  
resolution (see  
“RESOLUTION=  
FASTRES 1200” on  
page 217).  
• Checkthesoftwaresettings.(See • If you are having problems  
the software help.)  
• Try a different font.  
printing custom-size paper, see • Check that REt is on  
“Guidelines for printing custom- (see“RET=MEDIUM”on  
• Downloaded resources might  
size paper” on page 63.  
page 217.  
have been lost. You might need to • If pages are wrinkled or curled, • Go to “Correcting  
download them again.  
or if the image is skewed on the  
page, see “Correcting output  
quality problems” on page 128.  
output quality  
problems” on  
page 128.  
EN  
Determining printer problems 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
YES G For other problems,  
check the Contents,  
the Index, or the  
5 Does the printer select the proper trays,  
output locations, and paper handling  
accessories?  
printer software help.  
NO  
The printer pulls paper from the An optional accessory is not A message other than  
wrong tray. working properly. READYis displayed.  
• See “Customizing what tray is • Print a configuration page to • Go to “Understanding  
used for printing” on page 68.  
• Make sure paper trays are  
correctly configured for paper  
size and type (see “Loading  
verify that the accessory is  
installed properly and is  
functional (see “Configuration  
page” on page 152).  
printer messages” on  
page 111.  
trays 2, 3, and 4” on page 47). • Configuretheprinterdriverfor  
Print a configuration page to see  
current tray settings (see  
“Configuration page” on  
page 152).  
the installed accessories (see  
the software help).  
• Turn the printer off, and then  
turn the printer on.  
• Make sure the tray selection (or • Verify that you are using the  
paper type) in the printer driver  
or software application is set  
correct optional accessory for  
the printer.  
correctly. (The printer driver and • If the optional duplexer will not  
software application settings  
override the printer control panel  
settings.)  
duplex, check that the rear  
output bin is closed.  
• If the optional duplexer will not  
duplex, you might need to  
install more memory (see  
“Printer memory and  
• If you do not want to print from  
tray 1, remove any paper loaded  
in the tray or change the TRAY 1  
MODEsetting to CASSETTE(see  
“Customizing tray 1 operation”  
on page 69). By default, paper  
loaded in tray 1 will be printed  
first.  
expansion” on page 229).  
• If you want to print from tray 1,  
but cannot select the tray from a  
software application, see  
“Customizing tray 1 operation”  
on page 69.  
142 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting flowchart for Macintosh  
users  
YES G  
Go to step 2.  
1 Can you print from a software  
application?  
NO  
The Macintosh computer is Auto Setup did not  
not communicating with the automatically set up the  
The printer driver  
icon does not  
appear in the  
Chooser.  
printer.  
printer.  
• Make sure the printer control  
paneldisplaysREADY(seethefirst  
page of “Troubleshooting  
• Set up the printer manually by • Make sure the Apple  
selecting Configure.  
• Reinstall the printer software.  
LaserWriter 8  
Chooser extension  
flowchart” on page 137).  
(See the getting started guide.) resides in the  
• Select an alternate PPD (see Extensions folder.  
“Selecting an alternate PPD” • If it is not present  
• Make sure the correct printer  
driver is selected in the left half of  
the Chooser. Then make sure  
on page 145).  
anywhere on your  
system, contact  
that the desired printer name is • The PPD might have been  
selected(highlighted)ontheright  
half of the Chooser. There will be  
an icon next to the printer name  
after the driver has been set up  
and configured with the PPD.  
• If the printer resides on a network  
with multiple zones, make sure  
the correct zone is selected in the  
AppleTalk Zones box in the  
Chooser.  
renamed. If so, select the  
renamed PPD (see “Selecting  
an alternate PPD” on  
page 145).  
• A network queue might be  
present.  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
• Make sure the correct printer has  
been chosen in the Chooser by  
printing a configuration (see  
“Configuration page” on  
page 152). Make sure the name  
of the printer displayed on the  
configuration page matches the  
printer in the Chooser.  
• Make sure AppleTalk is active.  
(Select this in the Chooser or in  
the AppleTalk control panel,  
whichever is applicable for your  
OS version.)  
• Make sure the computer and  
printer are on the same network.  
From Control Panels in the Apple  
menu, select the Network (or the  
AppleTalk)controlpanelandthen  
choose the correct network (for  
example, LocalTalk or EtherNet).  
EN  
Determining printer problems 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
YES G For other problems,  
check the Contents, the  
Index, or the printer  
online help.  
2 Does the job print as expected?  
NO  
The print job is  
not sent to the  
desired printer.  
The print job  
has incorrect  
fonts.  
The computer cannot be  
used while the printer is  
printing.  
• Another printer with the same • If you are printing an .eps file, • Select Print in  
or similar name might have  
received the print job. Verify  
thattheprinternamematches  
the name selected in the  
Chooser (see “Selecting an  
alternate PPD” on page 145).  
try downloading the fonts  
contained in the .eps file to  
the printer before printing.  
Use the HP LaserJet Utility  
(see “HP LaserJet Utility” on  
page 40).  
• If the document is not printing  
with New York, Geneva, or  
Monaco fonts, go into the  
Page Setup dialog box, and  
select Options to deselect  
substituted fonts.  
Background from the  
Background Printing menu  
in the Print Dialog box.  
Status messages will be  
redirected to the Desktop  
Print Monitor, allowing the  
computer to continue  
working while the printer is  
printing.  
144 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting an alternate PPD  
1
2
3
Open the Chooser from the Apple menu.  
Click the LaserWriter 8 icon.  
If you are on a network with multiple zones, select the zone in the  
AppleTalk Zones box where the printer is located.  
4
Click the printer name you want to use in the Select a PostScript  
Printer box. (Double-clicking will immediately generate the next  
few steps.)  
5
6
7
Click Setup. (This button might read Create for first-time setup.)  
Click Select PPD.  
Find the desired PPD in the list and click Select. If the desired  
PPD is not listed, choose one of the following options:  
• Select a PPD for a printer with similar features.  
• Select a PPD from another folder.  
• Select the generic PPD by clicking Use Generic. The generic  
PPD allows you to print, but limits your access to printer  
features.  
8
In the Setup dialog box, click Select, and then click OK to return  
to the Chooser.  
Note  
If you manually select a PPD, an icon might not appear next to the  
selected printer in the Select a PostScript Printer box. In the  
Chooser, click Setup, click Printer Info, and then click Update Info to  
bring up the icon.  
9
Close the Chooser.  
Renaming the printer  
If you are going to rename the printer, do this before selecting the  
printer in the Chooser. If you rename the printer after selecting it in  
the Chooser, you will have to go back into the Chooser and  
reselect it.  
Use the Set Printer Name feature in the HP LaserJet Utility to  
rename the printer.  
EN  
Determining printer problems 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting the optional printer hard disk  
accessory  
Troubleshooting the optional printer hard disk accessory  
Item  
Explanation  
Printer does not  
recognize the hard disk  
accessory.  
Turntheprinteroffandverifythattheharddiskaccessoryisinserted  
correctly and is securely fastened. Print a configuration page to  
confirm that the hard disk accessory has been recognized (see  
“Configuration page” on page 152).  
Disk is not initialized.  
DISK x NOT  
Use the Windows-based HP Resource Manager or the Macintosh-  
based HP LaserJet Utility to initialize the disk.  
INITIALIZED  
Disk failure.  
EIO x DISK  
Turn the printer off and make sure that the EIO disk is inserted  
correctly and securely fastened. If the control panel message  
continues to be displayed, the disk drive needs to be replaced.  
NOT FUNCTIONAL  
Disk is write protected.  
DISK IS  
Fonts and forms cannot be stored on the disk when the disk is write  
protected. Use the Windows-based HP LaserJet Resource  
Manager or the Macintosh-based HP LaserJet Utility to remove the  
write protection from the disk.  
WRITE PROTECTED  
Attempted to use a  
disk-resident font, but  
theprintersubstituteda  
different font.  
If you are using PCL, print the PCL Font Page, and verify that the  
font is on the disk. If you are using PS, print the PS Font Page and  
make sure that the font is on the disk. If the font is not on the disk,  
use the HP Resource Manager or the Macintosh-based  
HP LaserJet Utility to download the font. (See “PCL or PS font list”  
on page 156).  
146 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting PS  
PS troubleshooting  
Item  
Explanation  
A text listing of PS  
commands prints  
instead of your PS  
printing job.  
The control panel PERSONALITY=AUTOsetting may have been  
confused by a nonstandard PS code. Check the PERSONALITY  
setting to see if it is set to PSor PCL (see “Configuration Menu” on  
page 219). If it is set to PCL, set it to PERSONALITY=AUTO. If it is set  
to AUTO, set it to PSfor this print job only. When the job has printed,  
return the setting to AUTO.  
ThejobprintsinCourier The requested typeface is not available in the printer or is not  
(the printer’s default  
font) instead of the font  
you requested.  
present on the disk. Use a font download utility to download the  
desired font.  
Fonts downloaded to memory are lost when the printer is turned  
off. They are also lost if Resource Saving is not used and a  
personality switch is performed to print a PCL job. Disk fonts are  
not affected by PCL jobs or by turning the printer off.  
Print a PS Font Page to verify that the font is available (see “PCL  
or PS font list” on page 156). If a disk font appears to be missing, it  
may be because a software utility was used to delete the font,  
because the disk was re-initialized, or because the disk drive is not  
installed correctly. Print a configuration page to verify that the disk  
drive is installed and functioning correctly (see“Configuration page”  
on page 152).  
Print a file directory to help identify available fonts (see “Information  
Menu” on page 208).  
A page prints with  
clipped margins.  
If the page margins are clipped, you may have to print the page at  
300-dpi resolution or install more memory.  
A page fails to print.  
Set PRINT PS ERRORS=ON(see “Configuration Menu” on page 219,  
and then send the job again to print a PS error page.  
A PS error page prints. Make sure the print job is a PS job.  
Check to see whether your software expected you to send a setup  
or PS header file to the printer.  
Check the printer setup in your software application to make sure  
that the printer is selected.  
Check cable connections to ensure that they are secure.  
Reduce the complexity of the graphic.  
Printer pulls paper from  
the wrong tray.  
Use the information in “Customizing what tray is used for printing”  
on page 68 to change the tray being used.  
EN  
Troubleshooting PS 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting optional HP Fast InfraRed  
Receiver problems  
Troubleshooting HP Fast InfraRed Receiver problems  
Item  
Explanation  
FIR port status  
indicator does not  
light up.  
Make sure that the printer is in READYmode and that the FIR port  
you are printing from is IRDA-compliant and within the range of  
operation described in the user guide for the HP Fast InfraRed  
Receiver.  
MakesurethattheHPFastInfraRedReceiverisproperlyconnected  
to the printer.  
Print a configuration page (see “Configuration page” on page 152).  
Make sure that “FIR POD (IRDA Compliant)” is printed under  
Installed Personalities and Options.  
Connection cannot be  
Use a device that is IRDA-compliant; look for an IRDA symbol on  
establishedorseemsto the device or see the computer’s user guide for IRDA specifications.  
take longer than usual.  
Connection often cannot take place because the computer does  
not have the software that is required for FIR. Make sure that the  
operating system on your computer includes an FIR driver and your  
application uses an HP LaserJet 4100, 4100N, 4100TN, 4100DTN,  
or compatible driver.  
Note that complex pages take longer to print.  
PositiontheHPFastInfraRedReceiverwithintherangeofoperation  
describedintheuserguidefortheHP FastInfraRedReceiver. Make  
sure that no object is blocking the connection. (This object could be  
a hand, paper, books, or even bright light.)  
Make sure that the two IR ports are clean (free from dirt and grease).  
Bright light of any kind (sunlight, incandescent light, fluorescent  
light, or light from an infrared remote control, such as those used  
for TVs and VCRs) shining directly into one of the IR ports might  
cause interference. Make sure that no bright light is shining directly  
into either IR port.  
Position the portable device closer to the FIR port on the printer.  
The printer prints only  
part of a page or  
document.  
The connection has been broken during transmission. If you move  
the portable device during transmission, the connection can be  
broken. IRDA-compliant devices are designed to recover from  
temporary connection interruptions. You have up to 40 seconds to  
re-establish the connection (depending on the portable device  
being used).  
148 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting HP Fast InfraRed Receiver problems (continued)  
Item  
Explanation  
The print job has been  
properly sent, but the  
printer will not print.  
If the connection is broken before the entire print job has been  
transmitted to the printer (printing has not yet started), the printer  
may not print any of the job. Press CANCEL JOB to clear the printer’s  
memory. Then, reposition the portable device within the range of  
operation described in the user guide for the HP Fast InfraRed  
Receiver, and print the job again.  
The FIR status  
indicator turns off  
during transmission.  
The connection might have been broken. Press CANCEL JOB to clear  
the printer’s memory. Then, reposition the portable device within  
the range of operation described in the user guide for the HP Fast  
InfraRed Receiver, and print the job again.  
EN  
Troubleshooting optional HP Fast InfraRed Receiver problems 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communicating with an optional HP JetDirect  
print server  
If the printer contains an optional HP JetDirect print server, and you  
cannot communicate with the printer over the network, verify the  
operation of the print server.  
G
Check the HP JetDirect configuration page (to print, see  
“Configuration page” on page 152).  
G
If the message, “I/O CARD READY” does not appear on the  
HP JetDirect configuration page, see the troubleshooting section  
of the HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide.  
If the printer contains an HP JetDirect 10/100TX print server, check to  
see that the print server was able to link to the network:  
G
Check the link-speed indicators (10 or 100) on the print server. If  
both are off, the print server failed to link to the network.  
G
Check the HP JetDirect configuration page. The message “LOSS  
OF CARRIER ERROR” indicates that the print server failed to link  
to the network.  
If the print server failed to link, verify that all cables are correctly  
connected. If all cables are correctly connected and the print server  
still fails to link, follow the steps below to reconfigure the print server:  
1
Use the EIO Menu to manually set the link speed (10 or  
100 Mbps) and duplex mode (full- or half-duplex) so that they  
match the network (see “EIO Menu” on page 225). For example, if  
the port on the network switch is set for 100TX full-duplex  
operation, you must set the print server for 100TX full-duplex  
operation.  
2
Turn the printer off and back on and check the print server  
operation. If the print server fails to link, try a different network  
cable.  
150 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Checking the printer configuration  
From the printer control panel, you can print pages that give details  
about the printer and its current configuration. The following  
information pages are described here:  
G
G
G
Menu map  
Configuration page  
Supplies status page (includes information on toner cartridge  
use)  
G
PCL or PS font list  
For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, see the  
Information Menu in the printer control panel (“Information Menu” on  
page 208).  
Keep these pages handy for troubleshooting. They are also useful if  
you contact HP Customer Care.  
Menu map  
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the  
control panel, print a control panel menu map:  
1
At the printer control panel, press MENU until INFORMATION MENU  
appears.  
2
3
Press ITEM until PRINT MENU MAPappears.  
Press SELECT to print the menu map.  
You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference.  
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options  
currently installed in the printer. (Many of these values can be  
overridden from the printer driver or software application.)  
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see  
Appendix B. To change a control panel setting, see “Control panel  
menus” on page 32.  
EN  
Checking the printer configuration 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuration page  
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help  
troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional  
accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer  
languages.  
Note  
If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet 4100N,  
4100TN, and 4100DTN printers), an HP JetDirect configuration page  
will print out as well.  
To print a configuration page at the control panel:  
1
2
3
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENUappears.  
Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIGURATIONappears.  
Press SELECT to print the page. Note the pages since last  
maintenance.  
The next page contains an example of the configuration page. The  
content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options  
currently installed in the printer.  
Note  
You can also obtain configuration information from the embedded web  
server. For details, see “Embedded web server” on page 251.  
152 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuration page  
4100 Series printers  
1
2
4
5
3
6
1 Printer Information  
2 Event Log  
Lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP addresses, page  
counts, and other information for the printer.  
Lists the number of entries in the event log, the maximum  
number of entries viewable, and the last three entries.  
3 Installed Personalities  
Lists all printer languages that are installed (such as PCL and  
PS) and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and  
EIO slot.  
and Options  
4 Memory  
5 Security  
Lists printer memory, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and  
I/O buffering and resource saving information.  
Lists the status of the printer control panel lock, control panel  
password, and disk drive.  
6 Paper Trays and  
Lists the size settings for all trays and lists optional paper  
handling accessories that are installed.  
Options  
EN  
Checking the printer configuration 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Supplies status page  
Use the supplies status page to obtain information about the toner  
cartridge installed in the printer, the amount of toner left in the toner  
cartridge, and the number of pages and jobs that have been  
processed. The page also lets you know when you should schedule  
the next preventative maintenance (see “Performing preventative  
maintenance” on page 93).  
To print a supplies status page at the control panel:  
1
2
3
Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears.  
Press ITEM until PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE appears.  
Press SELECT to print the page.  
The next page contains an example of the supplies status page.  
Note  
You can also obtain supplies status information from the embedded  
web server. For details, see “Embedded web server” on page 251.  
154 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Supplies status page  
1
2
6
7
3
4
5
1 Supplies website  
Local website for ordering supplies through the Internet.  
2 Cartridge  
Information about the amount of toner available in the toner  
cartridge, toner cartridge part number, and estimated pages  
remaining for the amount of toner left in the cartridge.  
information  
3 Printing statistics  
Statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed.  
Toner cartridge manufacture date and serial number.  
4 Manufacture  
information  
5 Recycling website  
Website for information about returning used HP toner cartridges.  
6 Maintenance kit  
A gauge to let you know what percentage of the maintenance kit  
has been used.  
gauge  
7 Printer information  
Total printer page count, preventative maintenance interval, pages  
until next maintenance should be performed, and serial number of  
the printer.  
EN  
Checking the printer configuration 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PCL or PS font list  
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the  
printer. (The font lists also show which fonts are resident on an  
optional hard disk accessory or flash DIMM.)  
To print a PCL or PS font list  
1
2
3
At the printer control panel, press MENU until INFORMATION MENU  
appears.  
Press ITEM until PRINT PCL FONT LISTor PRINT PS FONT LIST  
appears.  
Press SELECT to print the font list.  
The PS font list shows the PS fonts installed, and gives a sample of  
those fonts. The following describes the information that can be found  
on the PCL font list:  
G
G
G
Font gives the font names and samples.  
Pitch/Point indicates the pitch and point size of the font.  
Escape Sequence (a PCL 5e programming command) is used to  
select the designated font. (See the legend at the bottom of the  
font list page.)  
Note  
For step-by-step instructions on using printer commands to select a  
font with DOS applications, see “Selecting PCL 5e fonts” on page 238.  
G
Font # is the number used to select fonts from the printer control  
panel (not the software application). Do not confuse the font #  
with the font ID, described below. The number indicates the DIMM  
slot where the font is stored.  
• SOFT: Downloaded fonts, which stay resident in the printer  
until other fonts are downloaded to replace them, or until the  
printer is turned off.  
• INTERNAL: Fonts that permanently reside in the printer.  
G
Font ID is the number you assign to soft fonts when you  
download them through software.  
156 Chapter 4 - Problem solving  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Service and support  
5
HP Customer Care Service and Support  
Online services  
For 24-hour access to information, we suggest the services listed in  
this section.  
World Wide Web  
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, plus product and support  
information may be obtained from the following URLs:  
in the U.S.  
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4100  
Printer drivers may be obtained from the following websites:  
in China  
in Japan  
in Korea  
in Taiwan  
ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/lj4100  
ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/lj4100  
http://www.hp.co.kr/support/lj4100  
http://www.hp.com.tw/support/lj4100 or the  
local driver website http://www.dds.com.tw  
EN  
HP Customer Care Service and Support 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Software utilities and electronic information  
Contact information  
Countries/regions  
U.S.  
Monday - Friday: 6:00 am - 10:00 pm MST  
Saturday: 9:00 am - 4:00 pm MST  
Phone: (661) 257-5565  
Fax: (661) 257-6995  
HP website: http://www.hp.com/  
Mail:  
Hewlett-Packard Co.  
P. O. B o x 9 0 7  
Santa Clarita, CA 91380-9007  
USA  
Canada  
Europe  
Phone: (905) 206-4663  
The languages supported are also listed below beside the telephone  
numbers. Hours of operation are 7:30 am GMT (8:30 am CET) to 17:00  
GMT (18:00 CET).  
Within UK  
Internationally  
English speaking line  
French speaking line  
German speaking line  
Italian speaking line  
Spanish speaking line  
Portuguese speaking line  
01429 865511  
+44 1429 865511  
+44 1429 863343  
+44 1429 863353  
+44 1429 520013  
+44 1429 520012  
+44 1429 890466  
Asia Pacific  
country/region China (Beijing)  
Australia  
+61 3 9272 8000  
+86 10 65053888  
+65 740-4477  
+91 (011) 682 6035  
+65 740-4477  
+81 3 53461891  
+82 2 3270 0805  
+65 740-4477  
0800-445-543 (toll free) or  
(09) 356 6640  
Hong Kong  
India  
Indonesia  
Japan  
Korea  
Malaysia  
New Zealand  
Philippines  
Singapore  
Taiwan  
+65 740-4477  
+65 740-4477  
+886 (02) 717 0055  
+66 (02) 661-3900 ext 3224  
Thailand  
158 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Countries/regions  
Contact information  
Latin America Argentina  
8:30 to19:30 hrs.  
Buenos Aires:  
787-8080  
Brazil  
8:00 to19:00 hrs.  
São Paulo:  
011-829-6612  
800-360999  
Chile  
8:30 to18:30 hrs.  
Chile:  
Colombia  
Local dealers provide  
technical assistance  
Mexico “HP Contigo”  
8:00 to18:00 hrs.  
Mexico:  
01-800-4726684 and 01 800-4720684  
Venezuela  
8:00 to18:00 hrs.  
Caracas:  
800-47-888  
207-8488  
Technical Assistance for other Latin American countries is provided by local  
dealers.  
EN  
HP Customer Care Service and Support 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies  
To order accessories or supplies:  
G
G
call (800) 752-0900 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3154 (Canada)  
visit the HP LaserJet supplies website that is local to your area  
(print a copy of the supplies status page to learn the URL, as  
described in “Supplies status page” on page 154)  
HP direct ordering for genuine HP parts  
In the U.S., call (800) 227-8164.  
HP service parts information CD  
This powerful, CD-based parts information tool is designed to give  
users fast, easy access to parts information such as pricing and  
recommended stocking lists for a wide range of HP products. To  
subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada, call  
(800) 336-5987. In Asia Pacific, call (65) 740-4484. Parts  
identification and pricing information worldwide can also be accessed  
via the World Wide Web at http:/www.hp.com/go/partsinfo.  
HP Support Assistant CD  
This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system  
designed to provide technical and product information on HP  
products. To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada,  
call (800) 457-1762. In Hong Kong, Indonesia, Malaysia, or  
Singapore, call Mentor Media at (65) 740-4477.  
HP authorized resellers and support  
To locate authorized HP resellers and support, call (800) 243-9816  
(U.S.) or (800) 387-3867 (Canada).  
HP service agreements  
Call (800) 743-8305 (U.S.) or (800) 268-1221 (Canada).  
160 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
HP SupportPacks  
The HP SupportPack is a packaged service agreement that upgrades  
your basic LaserJet product warranty (1 year), and extends coverage  
to 5 years.  
HP SupportPacks are sold by HP resellers and are available in either  
a shrink-wrap version for a 3-year service package only (you must  
register with HP to activate service) or an electronic version for a 1-,  
2-, 3-, 4-, or 5-year service package (you can register by fax or on the  
World Wide Web).  
For ordering and pricing details, contact your local HP reseller or visit  
the HP website at http://www.hp.com/go/printerservices for more  
information.  
HP fraud hotline  
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America)  
when you install an HP LaserJet toner cartridge and the printer  
message says the cartridge is non-HP toner. HP will help determine if  
the product is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.  
Your toner cartridge might not be a genuine HP toner cartridge if you  
notice the following:  
G
you are experiencing a high number of problems with the toner  
cartridge  
G
the cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the  
pull tab or the box is different)  
EN  
HP Customer Care Service and Support 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Customer support options worldwide  
“Worldwide country/region sales and service offices” on page 172  
contains addresses and phone numbers for countries/regions not  
listed here.  
HP Customer Care Center and product repair  
assistance for the U.S. and Canada  
For technical support and help in identifying whether a product needs  
repair, call (208) 323-2551 (U.S.) or (905) 206-4663 (Canada)  
Monday through Friday from 6 am to 6 pm (Mountain Time) free of  
charge during the warranty period. However, your standard long-  
distance phone charges still apply. Have your system nearby and your  
printer serial number ready when calling.  
If you know your printer needs repair, call (800) 243-9816 to locate  
your nearest authorized HP service provider.  
If the printer warranty has expired, post-warranty telephone  
assistance is available to answer your product questions. Call  
(900) 555-1500 ($2.50* per minute, U.S. only) or call (800) 999-1148  
($25* per call, Visa or MasterCard, U.S. and Canada) Monday  
through Friday from 7am to 6 pm (Mountain Time). Charges begin  
only when you connect with a support technician. *Prices subject to  
change.  
162 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
European HP Customer Care Center language  
and in-country options available  
Open Monday through Friday 8:30 - 18:00 Central European Time  
(CET)  
HP provides a free telephone support service during the warranty  
period. By calling a telephone number listed below, you will be  
connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. If you require  
support after your warranty has expired, you can receive support for a  
fee through the same telephone number. The fee is charged on a  
per-incident basis. When calling HP, have the following information  
ready: product number, serial number, date of purchase, and  
description of the problem.  
English  
Ireland: 353 (0)1 662 5525  
U.K.: 44 (0)171 512 5202  
International: 44 (0)(171) 512 5202  
Dutch  
Belgium: 32 (0)2 6268806  
Netherlands: 31 (0)20 606 8751  
French  
France: 33 (0)1 43 62 34 34  
Belgium: 32 (0)2 626 8807  
Switzerland: 41 (0)848 80 11 11  
German  
Germany: 49 (0)180 52 58 143  
Austria: 43 (0)7114 201080  
Norwegian  
Danish  
Norway: 47 22 11 6299  
Denmark: 45 39 29 4099  
Finland: (358) (0)203 47 288  
Sweden: 46 (0)8 619 2170  
Italy: 39 02 264 10350  
Finnish  
Swedish  
Italian  
Spanish  
Portuguese  
Spain: 34 902 321 123  
Portugal: 351 (0)1 3176333  
EN  
Customer support options worldwide 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In-country/region support numbers  
HP provides a free telephone support service during the warranty  
period. By calling a telephone number listed below, you will be  
connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. If you require  
support after your warranty has expired, you can receive support for a  
fee through the same telephone number. The fee is charged on a  
per-incident basis. When calling HP, have the following information  
ready: product number, serial number, date of purchase, and  
description of the problem.  
If you require support after your warranty has expired, additional  
product repair services, or if your country/region is not listed below,  
see “Worldwide country/region sales and service offices” on  
page 172.  
Argentina  
Australia  
Brazil  
(541) 778 8380  
61 3 8877 8000  
(011) 82 6612  
Canada  
China  
Chile  
(905) 206-4663  
86 (0)10 6564 5959  
800 360 999  
Czech Republic  
Greece  
Hong Kong  
Hungary  
India  
Indonesia  
Japan  
Korea (Seoul)  
42 (0)2 6130 7310  
30 (0)1 689 64 11  
800-96-7729  
36 (0)1) 382 1111  
91 11 682 6035  
62-21-350 3408  
81-3-3335 8333  
82-2-3270 0700  
Korea outside Seoul 080 999 0700  
Malaysia  
Mexico  
New Zealand  
Philippines  
Poland  
Portugal  
Russia  
Singapore  
South Africa  
Switzerland  
Taiwan  
60 (3) 295 2566  
01-800-472 6684  
64 9 356 6640  
63 (2) 867 3551  
48 22 519 06 00  
(351) (1) 301-7330  
7 095797 3520  
65 272 5300  
27 86 000 1030  
41 (01)848 80 11 11  
886 (2) 2717 0055  
66 (2) 661 4000  
90 212 224 59 25  
800 47 8488  
Thailand  
Turkey  
Venezuela  
Vietnam  
84 (0) 8 823 4530  
164 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Warranty information  
For warranty statements, see “Hewlett-Packard limited warranty  
statement” on page 167 and “Limited warranty for toner cartridge life”  
on page 169. You can also locate printer warranties on the World  
Wide Web (see “World Wide Web” on page 157).  
Service during and after the warranty period:  
G
If printer hardware fails during the warranty period, see  
“HP Customer Care Center and product repair assistance for the  
U.S. and Canada” on page 162 or “European HP Customer Care  
Center language and in-country options available” on page 163.  
G
G
If printer hardware fails after the warranty period, and you have an  
HP Maintenance Agreement or HP Support Pack, request service  
as specified in the agreement.  
If you do not have an HP Maintenance Agreement or HP Support  
Pack, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider (see  
“HP authorized resellers and support” on page 160).  
If you are shipping equipment to be serviced, use the following  
repacking guidelines.  
Guidelines for repacking the printer  
G
G
G
Remove and retain any DIMMs (dual in-line memory modules)  
installed in the printer (see “Installing memory” on page 230).  
Remove and retain any optional accessories installed in the  
printer (such as the duplexer or hard disk).  
Remove and retain the toner cartridge.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, store the cartridge in its  
original packing material, or store it so that it is not exposed to light.  
G
Use the original shipping container and packing material, if  
possible. (Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is  
the customer’s responsibility.) If you have already disposed of the  
printer’s packing material, contact a local mailing service for  
information on repacking the printer.  
G
G
G
If possible, include print samples and 50-100 sheets of paper or  
any other media that is not printing correctly.  
Include a completed copy of the Service Information Form  
(“Service information form” on page 166).  
HP recommends insuring the equipment for shipment.  
EN  
Warranty information 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Service information form  
Date:  
WHO IS RETURNING THE EQUIPMENT?  
Person to contact:  
Phone: (  
Phone: (  
)
)
Alternate contact:  
Return shipping address:  
Special shipping instructions:  
WHAT IS BEING SENT?  
Model name:  
Model number:  
Serial number:  
Please attach any relevant print-outs when returning equipment. DO NOT ship accessories that are not required to  
complete the repair (manuals, cleaning supplies, etc.).  
WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE? (Attach a separate sheet if necessary.)  
1. Describe the conditions of the failure. (What was the failure? What were you doing when the  
failure occurred? What software were you running? Is the failure repeatable?)  
2. If the failure is intermittent, how much time elapses between failures?  
3. Is the unit connected to any of the following? (Give manufacturer and model number.)  
Personal computer:  
Modem:  
Network:  
4. Additional comments:  
HOW WILL YOU PAY FOR THE REPAIR?  
G Under warranty  
Purchase/received date: ______________________  
(Enclose proof of purchase or receiving document with original received date.)  
G Maintenance contract number: ______________________  
G Purchase order number: ______________________  
Except for contract and warranty service, a purchase order number and/or authorized  
signature must accompany any request for service. If standard repair prices do not apply,  
a minimum purchase order is required. Standard repair prices may be obtained by contacting  
an HP-authorized Repair Center.  
Authorized signature: ______________________________  
Billing address: Special billing instructions:  
Phone: ________________  
166 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement  
HP PRODUCT  
DURATION OF WARRANTY  
HP LaserJet 4100, 4100N,  
4100TN, 4100DTN  
1 year, return to HP or  
Authorized Dealer  
1. HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware, accessories and  
supplies will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of  
purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects  
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products  
which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or  
equivalent in performance to new.  
2
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming  
instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to  
defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP  
receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace  
software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such  
defects.  
3
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or  
error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any  
product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the  
purchase price upon prompt return of the product.  
4
5
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance  
or may have been subject to incidental use.  
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate  
maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied  
by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the  
published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site  
preparation or maintenance.  
6
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE  
EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER  
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY  
DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries, states or provinces do not allow  
limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or  
exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and  
you might also have other rights that vary from country to country, state to state, or  
province to province.  
EN  
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS  
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.  
EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS  
BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER  
DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some  
countries, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental  
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to  
you.  
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE  
EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY  
AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE  
TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
168 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Limited warranty for toner cartridge life  
Note  
The warranty below applies to the toner cartridge that came with this  
printer. This warranty supersedes all previous warranties (7/19/96).  
The HP toner cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in  
materials and workmanship for the life of the cartridge until the HP  
toner is depleted. Your HP toner is depleted when your printer  
indicates a toner-low message. HP will, at HP’s option, either replace  
products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.  
The warranty does not cover toner cartridges that have been refilled,  
are emptied, abused, misused, or tampered with in any way.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have  
other rights which vary from state to state, province to province, and  
country to country.  
To the extent allowed by applicable law, in no event shall Hewlett-  
Packard Company be liable for any incidental, consequential, special,  
indirect, punitive, or exemplary damages or lost profits from any break  
of this warranty or otherwise.  
EN  
Limited warranty for toner cartridge life 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
HP software license terms  
ATTENTION: USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP  
SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE  
SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE  
TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS, AND THE  
SOFTWARE IS BUNDLED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN  
THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND.  
The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying Software  
unless you have a separate signed agreement with HP.  
License Grant  
HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the Software. “Use” means storing,  
loading, installing, executing, or displaying the Software. You may not modify  
the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software. If the  
Software is licensed for “concurrent use,” you may not allow more than the  
maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently.  
Ownership  
The Software is owned and copyrighted by HP or its third party suppliers. Your  
license confers no title to, or ownership in, the Software and is not a sale of any  
rights in the Software. HP’s third party suppliers may protect their rights in the  
event of any violation of these License Terms.  
Copies and Adaptations  
You may only make copies or adaptations of the Software for archival purposes  
or when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the authorized Use of the  
Software. You must reproduce all copyright notices in the original Software on  
all copies or adaptations. You may not copy the Software onto any public  
network.  
No Disassembly or Decryption  
You may not disassemble or decompile the Software unless HP’s prior written  
consent is obtained. In some jurisdictions, HP’s consent may not be required  
for limited disassembly or decompilation. Upon request, you will provide HP  
with reasonably detailed information regarding any disassembly or  
decompilation. You may not decrypt the Software unless decryption is a  
necessary part of the operation of the Software.  
170 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Transfer  
Your license will automatically terminate upon any transfer of the Software.  
Upon transfer, you must deliver the Software, including any copies and related  
documentation, to the transferee. The transferee must accept these License  
Terms as a condition to the transfer.  
Termination  
HP may terminate your license upon notice for failure to comply with any of  
these License Terms. Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the  
Software, together with all copies, adaptations, and merged portions in any  
form.  
Export Requirements  
You may not export or reexport the Software or any copy or adaptation in  
violation of any applicable laws or regulations.  
U.S. Government Restricted Rights  
The Software and any accompanying documentation have been developed  
entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as “commercial  
computer software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS  
252.211-7015 (May 1991), or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a  
“commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101 (a), or as “Restricted computer  
software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent agency  
regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those  
rights provided for such Software and any accompanying documentation by  
the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement  
for the product involved.  
EN  
HP software license terms 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Worldwide country/region sales and service  
offices  
Note  
Before calling an HP Sales and Service office, be sure to contact the  
appropriate Customer Care Center number listed in the “HP Customer  
Care Service and Support” section. Products should not be returned  
to these offices. Product return information is also available through the  
appropriate HP Customer Care Center (see “HP Customer Care  
Service and Support” on page 157).  
Bulgaria  
S&T Bulgaria Ltd.  
Europe  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
2, "Iatashka" St.  
Sofia 1618  
Albania  
Gener-Al sh.p.k.  
Phone Number: +359-2-955 9573  
Fax: +359-2-955 9290  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
Tirana Trade Centre  
Rr. 'Durresit'  
Tirana  
Croatia (local name:  
Hrvatska)  
Phone Number: +355-42-23519  
Fax: +355-42-27966  
Hermes-Plus  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
Slandrove 2  
Austria  
SE 1231 Crnuce  
Phone Number: 38-512 331061  
Fax: 38-512 331930  
Wien  
Hewlett-Packard Ges.m.b.H  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Lieblgasse1  
1222 Vienna  
Phone Number: 01/25000-7006  
Fax: 01/25000-6558  
Cyprus  
Handled by G-Systems, Greece  
Czech Republic  
Belarus  
Hewlett-Packard  
Belhard  
Ceskoslovenski sro  
Novodvorska 82  
14200 Praha 414  
Phone Number: +420-2-613-07310  
Fax: +420-2-474 3293  
709, 2 Melnicayte Street  
Minsk 220600  
Phone Number: 375-172-238985  
Fax: 375-172-268426  
Belgium  
Denmark  
Hewlett-Packard Belgium S.A./N.V.  
Boulevard de la Woluwe 100-102  
B 1200 Brussels  
Hewlett-Packard A/S  
Kongevejen 25  
DK-3460 Birkerød  
Phone Number: (45) 45 99-10-00  
Fax: (45) 45-82-06-30  
Phone Number: (32/2) 778-34-17  
Fax: (32/2) 778-34-14  
E-Mail Address: [email protected]  
172 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Hannover  
Finland  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Baumschulenallee 20-22  
30625 Hannover  
Hewlett-Packard Oy  
Street Address:  
Piispankalliontie 17  
02200 ESPOO  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
Finland  
P.O.Box Address:  
P. O. B o x 6 8  
02201 ESPOO  
Leipzig  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Wehlitzer Strasse 2  
04435 Schkeuditz  
Phone Number: 358-9-8872 2100  
Fax: 358-9-8872 2923  
E-Mail Address: [email protected]  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
France  
Hewlett-Packard France  
Test et Mesure  
München  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Eschenstraße 5  
82024 Taufkirchen  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
Z.A. de Courtaboeuf  
1 Avenue du Canada  
91947 Les Ulis  
Phone Number: 01 69 29 41 14  
Fax: 01 69 29 65 09  
Nürnberg  
Germany  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Emmericher Straße 13  
90411 Nürnberg  
Böblingen  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Postfach 14 30  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
71004 Böblingen  
Phone Number: 0180/524-63 30  
Fax: 0180/524-63 31  
Ratingen  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Pempelfurt Straße 1  
40882 Ratingen  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
Bad Homburg  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Hewlett-Packard Straße 1  
61352 Bad Homburg  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
Waldbronn (Karlsruhe)  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Hewlett-Packard-Str. 8  
76337 Waldbronn  
Berlin  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Lützowplatz 15  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
10785 Berlin  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Herrenberger Straße 130  
7030 Böblingen  
Phone Number: (49) 7031/14-0  
Fax: (49) 7031/14-2999  
Hamburg  
Hewlett-Packard GmbH  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Überseering 16  
22297 Hamburg  
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330  
Fax: 0180/524-6331  
EN  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Milan  
Greece  
Phone Number: (39/2) 92-122-241  
Fax: (39/2) 92-104 069  
Kazakhstan  
G-Systems  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
76, Ymittou Street  
11634 Athens  
Scan East  
Karasat-Batyr street 82  
Almaty 480012  
Phone Number: (30/1) 7264045  
Fax: (30/1) 7264020  
Phone Number: 7-3272-622020  
Fax: 7-3272-621843  
Hungary  
Hewlett-Packard Magyarorszag  
KFT. Erzsébet  
királyne útja 1/c  
Macedonia, The Former  
Yugoslav Republic of  
1146 Budapest  
Hermes-Plus  
Phone Number: (36) 1 4618110  
Fax: (36) 1 4618222  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
Celovska 73  
61000 Ljubljana  
Slovenia  
Phone Number: 61/193322  
Fax: 61/55597  
Ireland  
Hewlett-Packard Ireland Limited  
Hewlett-Packard House  
Stradbrook Road  
Blackrock, Co.  
Dublin Ireland  
Phone Number: 01 615 8222  
Fax: 01 284 5134  
Netherlands  
Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.  
Postbox 667  
1180 AR Amstelveen  
Netherlands  
Phone Number: (31/20) 547-6669  
Fax: (31/20) 547-7765  
Italy  
Napoli  
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.  
Via Emanuele Gianturco, 92/G  
80146 Napoli (Na)  
Phone Number: (39/81) 0-73-40-100  
Fax: (39/81) 0-73-40-216  
Norway  
Hewlett-Packard Norge AS  
Drammensveien 169  
Postboks 60 Skøyen  
N-0212 OSLO  
Phone Number: +47 22 73 57 59  
Fax: +47 22 73 56 19  
E-Mail Address:  
Roma Eur  
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.  
Viale del Tintoretto, 200  
00142 Roma Eur  
test_measurement@norway.hp.com  
Phone Number: (39/6) 54-831  
Fax: (39/6) 54-01-661  
Poland  
Torino  
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.  
Hewlett-Packard Polska  
Ochota Park Office  
Via Praglia 15  
Aleje Jerozolimskie 181 02-222 Warszawa  
Phone Number: +48 (22) 6087700  
Fax: +48 (022) 6087600  
10044 Pianezza (To)  
Phone Number: (39/11) - 9685.1  
Fax: (30/11) - 968.5899  
For information on any products or services  
call: 02 92 122 241  
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.  
Via G. di Vittorio 9  
20063 Cernudsco s/N  
174 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Portugal  
Spain  
Hewlett-Packard Portugal S.A.  
Av. Marginal, Ed. Parque Oceano  
Piso 5°-G-St° Amaro de Oeiras  
2780 Oeiras  
Barcelona  
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.  
Avda. Diagonal, 605  
08028 Barcelona  
Phone Number: 34 93 401 91 00  
Fax: 34 93 430 84 68  
Phone Number: (353/1) 482 8500  
Fax: (353/1) 441-7071  
Madrid  
Romania  
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.  
S&T Romania SRL  
Crta N-VI km 16,500  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
Centrul Sitraco-Plata Unirii  
Bd. Dimitries Cantemir 1  
Etaj II-210 Sector 4  
28230 Las Rozas, Madrid  
Phone Number: (34/91) 6311323  
Fax: (34/91) 6311469  
Phone Number: +40 1 250 6175  
Sevilla  
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.  
Avda. Luis de Morales, 32  
Edifico Forum, planta 3&supa;, mòdulo1  
41018 Sevilla  
Phone Number: 34-95-455 2600  
Fax: 34-95-455 2626  
Bucuresti  
Phone Number: (40/1) 3307320  
Additional phone number(s):  
(40/1) 3307217,  
(40/1) 3307218  
Fax: (40/1) 3307310  
Service Hot Line: (40/1) 3307300  
Valencia  
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.  
Plaza de América, 2 2 B  
Edificio Zurich  
46004 Valencia  
Phone Number: 34-96-398 2200  
Fax: 34-96-398 2230  
Russian Federation  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
Representative Office  
Kosmodamianskaya naberezhnaya 52,  
Bldg. 1  
Vizcaya  
113054 Moscow  
Phone Number: +7 (095) 9169811  
Fax: +7 (095) 916848  
Avda de Sugaazarte  
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.  
Avda de Zugazarte, 8  
Edif El Abra, 4  
Slovakia (Slovak Republic)  
48930 Las Arenas, Guecho  
Phone Number: 34-94-481 80 00  
Fax: 34-94-481 80 40  
S&T Slovakia  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
Polianky 5  
SK 844 J4 Bratislava  
Phone Number: (+4217) 82 20 26 or  
82 20 98  
Sweden  
Kista  
Fax: (421) 7 763408  
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB  
Skalholtsgatan 9  
164 97 Kista  
Slovenia  
Phone Number: (46/8) 444 22 77  
Fax: (46/8) 444 25 25  
E-Mail Address: test-  
[email protected]  
Hermes-Plus  
Hewlett-Packard Distributor  
Slandraa 2  
1231 Ljubljana-Crnuce  
Phone Number: (386) 61-1895 200  
Fax: (386) 61 1895 201  
EN  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Göteborg  
Ukraine  
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB  
Vädursgatan 6  
S&T Ukraine Ltd.  
50, Popudrenko Street  
243660 Kiev  
Box 5328  
S-402 27 GÖTEBORG  
Sweden  
Phone Number: 380-44-559 4763  
Fax: 380-44-559 5033  
Phone Number: (46/31) 35 18 00  
Fax: (46/31) 35 18 99  
United Kingdom  
Hewlett-Packard Limited (T4)  
Cain Road  
Switzerland  
Bracknell  
Berkshire  
RG12 1HN  
Phone Number: 01344 366666  
Fax: 01344 362852  
Contact HP  
Berne  
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
Meriedweg 11  
3172 Niederwangen/Bern  
Phone Number: (01) 735 72 36  
Fax: (01) 735 77 03  
E-Mail Address: [email protected]  
Geneva  
Uzbekistan  
Hewlett-Packard (Suisse) SA  
Elektronische Meßtechnik 39, rue de  
Veyrot  
1217 Meyrin 1  
Phone Number: (01) 735 72 36  
Fax: (01) 735 77 03  
ABM Worldwide Technologies  
15, Movaraunnakhr Street  
Tashkent 700060  
Phone Number: 7-3712-1333689  
Fax: 7-3712-406485  
Zürich  
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG  
Elektronische Meßtechnik  
In der Luberzen 29  
Yugoslavia  
IBIS Instruments  
Pariske Komune 22  
11070 N. Beograd  
8902 Urdorf/Zürich  
Phone Number: 381-11-609650  
Fax: 381-11-699627  
Phone Number: (01) 735 72 36  
Fax: (01) 735 77 03  
Turkey  
Ankara  
Hewlett-Packard  
Bilgisayar ve Olcum Sistemleri A.S.  
Karum Is Merkezi No:461 (B-Asansoru)  
Iran Cad.No.21  
06680, Kavaklydere - Ankara  
Phone Number: (90/312) 468 87 70  
Fax: (90/312) 468 87 78  
Istanbul  
Hewlett-Packard  
Bilgisayar ve Olcum Sistemleri A.S.  
19 Mayis caddesi  
Nova/Baran Plaza K.12  
Sisli 80220  
Istanbul  
Phone Number: (90/212) 224 59 25 (12  
lines)  
Fax: (90/212) 224 59 39  
176 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chile  
Latin America and  
South America  
ASC. S.A. (Multi-Industry)  
Los Alerces 2363  
Santiago, Chile  
Phone Number: (56-2) 237-0707  
Fax: (56-2) 239-7179  
Argentina  
Hewlett-Packard Argentina  
Montañeses 2140  
COASIN Chile Ltda. (Telecom)  
Holanda 1292  
1428 Buenos Aires  
Phone Number: (54 1) 787-7115  
Fax: (54 1) 787-7287  
Santiago, Chile  
Phone Number: (562) 225-0643  
Fax: (562) 274-4588  
Belize  
Atendido por El Salvador  
Rimpex Chile (Datacom)  
Avda. Pedro de Valdivia 1646  
Santiago, Chile  
Phone Number: 562-340-7701/7702  
Fax: 562-274-4107  
Bolivia  
Atendido por Uruguay  
Colombia  
Brazil  
Instrumentación Ltda.  
Calle 115 No. 11-A-10  
Bogotá, Colombia  
São Paulo  
Hewlett-Packard Brasil SA  
R. Aruna 125  
Tambore - Barueri - SP  
06460-101  
Phone Number: (011) 829-6612  
Fax: (011) 829-0018  
Phone Number: (57-1) 612-1313  
Fax: (57-1) 612-0805  
Sycom, S.A. (Datacom)  
Avenida El Dorado 9010  
Bogotá, Colombia  
Phone Number: (57-1) 410-1303  
Fax: (57-1) 410-1196  
Rio de Janeiro  
Hewlett-Packard Brasil  
Rua Lauro Mueller, 116  
Grupo 803 Edifício Torre Rio Sul  
22290-160 Botafogo  
Rio de Janeiro  
Phone Number: (55-21) 541-4404  
Fax: (55-21) 295-2195  
Costa Rica  
COASIN COSTA RICA, S.A.  
Del Centro Cultural en San Pedro  
200 Mts Norte, 25 Mts Oeste  
Casa # 3552  
San José, Costa Rica  
Phone Number: (506) 283-8325  
Fax: (506) 225-6349  
Dominican Republic  
Esacomp, S.A.  
Calle Seminario No. 55  
Ens. Piantini  
Santo Domingo, República Dominicana  
Phone Number: (809) 563-6350  
Fax: (809) 565-0332  
EN  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ecuador  
Paraguay  
Complementos Electrónicos S.A.  
Av. General Enriquez 1800  
San Rafael, Ecuador  
Atendido por Uruguay  
Peru  
Phone Number: (593-2) 334257  
Fax: (593-2) 331595  
COASIN Peru S.A. (Redes Privadas)  
Calle 1 - No. 891 CORPAC  
Lima 27, Peru  
El Salvador  
SETISA  
Phone Number: (511) 224-3380  
Fax: (511) 224-1509  
Col. Roma  
Pje. Carbonell, No. 28  
San Salvador, El Salvador  
Phone Number: (503) 223-0993  
Fax: (503) 279-2077  
SATEL S.A. (Gobierno y redes publicas)  
Enrique Palacios No. 155  
Lima 18 - Peru  
Phone Number: (511) 446-2253/241-8085/  
446-0281  
Fax: (511) 444-0305  
Guatemala  
EPTEL  
Trinidad and Tobago  
12 Ave. 17-35 Zona 10  
Guatemala  
Phone Number: (502) 363-0423  
Fax: (502) 363-0443  
Borde Communications  
1 Valsayn Road  
Curepe, P.O. Box 897  
Port-of-Spain, Trinidad  
Phone Number: (809) 663-2087  
Fax: (809) 645-3352  
Honduras  
Atendido por Setisa, El Salvador  
United States  
Mexico  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
5200 Blue Lagoon Dr., #950  
Miami, FL 33126  
Hewlett-Packard de México SA de CV  
Dr. Atl No. 1, Desp. 102  
Edif. Tepeyac  
Phone Number: 305-265-5561  
Fax: 305-267-4288  
Zona Rio  
22320 Tijuana, B.C. México  
Phone Number: (66) 34-38-01  
Fax: (66) 34-38-04  
E-Mail Address: [email protected]  
Uruguay  
Hewlett-Packard de México, S.A. de C.V. Conatel S.A.  
Prolongación Reforma 700  
Col. Lomas de Santa Fé  
01210 Mexico, D.F.  
Ejido 1690  
Montevideo, Uruguay  
Phone Number: (598) 2-920314  
Phone Number: (52-5) 258-4389/258-4392 Fax: (598) 2-920660  
Fax: (52-5)258-4301  
HP DIRECT: 01-800-506-4800  
Venezuela  
Hewlett-Packard de Venezuela  
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico S.A. de C.V.  
Rio Nilo 4049-12  
Cd. Juarez, Chih. 32310  
Mexico  
3ra. Transversal Los Ruices Nrte  
Edf. Segre, Piso 1,2 y 3  
Caracas, Venezula  
Phone Number: (58-2) 207-8357  
Fax: (58-2) 207-8361  
Phone Number: (52-16) 11-0777  
Fax: (52-16) 13-7622  
Nicaragua  
Atendido por El Salvador  
178 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
China  
Asia and the Pacific  
Beijing  
China Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd.  
10/F, HP Building  
Australia  
No. 2 Dong San Huan Nan Lu  
Chao Yang District  
Melbourne  
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.  
Beijing 100022, P. R. China  
Phone Numbers: 86-6564 3888  
31-41 Joseph Street  
Blackburn, VIC 3130  
Phone Number: 1 800 629 485 (toll free)  
Additional phone number(s): (61 3) 9210  
5408  
Chengdu  
China Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd.  
Fax: (61 3) 9210-5489  
22/F Daye Road  
No. 39 Daye Road  
Chengdu 610016 PRC  
Phone Number: (86/28) 666-3888  
Fax: (86/28) 666-5377  
Perth  
Measurement Innovation (WA) Pty. Ltd.  
Kishorn Court  
Suite 3, 58 Kishorn Road  
Mount Pleasant, WA 6153  
Phone Number: (61/9) 316-2757  
Fax: (61/9) 316-1392  
Guangzhou  
China Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd.  
7/F T.P.Plaza  
9/109, Liu Hua Road  
Mobile: 61-18-33-6434  
Guangzhou 510010 PRC  
Phone Number: (86/20) 8669-3888  
Fax: (86/20) 8669-5074  
Telex: 44556 GPHGZ CN  
Sydney  
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.  
17-23 Talavera Road  
North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113  
Phone Number: (61/2) 9950-7444  
Fax: (61/2) 9888-9072  
Shanghai  
China Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.  
10-12/F Novel Building  
No. 887 Huai Hai Zhong Lu  
Shanghai, 200020  
Phone Number: (86/21) 6474-3888  
Fax: (86/21) 6267-8523  
Telex: 086-33577 CHPSB CN  
Bangladesh  
Jiu International Ltd  
60 East Tejturi Bazar, 2nd Floor  
Farmgate Dhaka  
Bangladesh  
Phone Number: 880-2-913-0480  
Fax: 880-2-871-034  
E-Mail Address: [email protected]  
Shenyang  
China Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.  
12/F Shenyang Sankei Torch  
Building No. 262 Shifu Road, Shenhe  
District  
Shenyang 110013 PRC  
Phone Number: (86/24) 2790170, 2790171  
Fax: (86/24) 2790232  
Brunei Darussalam  
Kompouter Wisman Sdn Bhd  
Block A, Unit 1, Ground Floor  
Abdul Razak Complex  
Jalan Gadong 3180  
Negara Brunei Darussalem  
Phone Number: 673-2-423918/425603  
Fax: 673-2-441492  
Telex: 0809-2447  
EN  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Xi'an Branch Office  
3/F East New Technology  
Trade Center A16  
India  
Bangalore  
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.  
Embassy Point  
Yanta Lu Zhong Duan  
Xi'an 710054 PRC  
150 Infantry Road  
Bangalore 560001  
Phone Number: (86/29) 552 9379  
Fax: (86/29) 552 9243  
Phone Number: (91/80) 225-3024 or 209-  
1808  
Fax: (91/80) 225-6186  
Telex: 845-2773 HP IN  
Hong Kong  
Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.  
17-21/F Shell Tower, Times Square  
1 Matheson Street  
Causeway Bay  
Hong Kong SAR  
Calcutta  
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.  
708 Central Plaza  
2/6 Sarat Bose Road  
Calcutta 700 020  
Phone Number: (852) 2599-7777  
Fax: (852) 2506-9256  
Hong Kong  
Phone Number: (91/33) 745 4755  
Additional phone number(s): 91-33-475-  
4755  
Hewlett-Packard (HK) Ltd.  
17-21/F Shell Tower, Times Square  
1 Matheson Street  
Fax: (91/33) 748 571  
Causeway Bay  
Hong Kong SAR  
Phone Number: (852) 2599-7889  
Fax: (852) 2506-9233  
Hyderabad  
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.  
5-9-13 Taramandal Complex  
9th Floor, Saifabad  
Hyderabad 500 004  
Taiwan  
Phone Number: (91/40) 232-679  
Fax: (91/40) 220.012 or 231.756  
Telex: 425-2422 HPIL IN  
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.  
No. 20 Kao-Shuang Road  
Ping-Chen, 32404  
Taoyuan Hsieh  
Phone Number: (886/3) 492-9666  
Fax: (886/3) 492-9669  
Mumbai  
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.  
Unit-3, B-Wing  
Ground Floor, Neelam Center  
Hind Cycle Road  
Worli, Mumbai 400 025  
Phone Number: (91/22) 493-4722 or 493-  
4723  
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.  
12th Floor, 10 Syh-Wei 4th Road  
Kaohsiung  
Phone Number: (886/7) 330-1199  
Fax: (886/7) 330-8568  
Additional phone number(s): 91-22-493-  
9978-79 or 91-22-493  
Fax: (91/22) 493-7823  
Telex: 11-76812 HPIB IN  
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.  
10F, 540, Sec. 1  
Wen-Hsin Road  
Taichung  
Phone Number: (886/4) 327-0153  
Fax: (886/4) 326-5274  
New Delhi  
Hewlett-Packard India Ltd.  
Chandiwalla Estate  
Ma Anandmai Ashram Marg, Kalkaji  
New Delhi 110 019  
Phone Number: (91-11) 682-6000  
Fax: (91-11) 682-6030  
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.  
Hewlett-Packard Building  
8/F No. 337, Fu-Hsing North Road  
Taipei 10483 Taiwan  
Phone Number: (886-2) 712-0404  
Fax: (886-2) 718-2928  
HP DIRECT Basic Tools free tel:  
080-212-535  
180 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Penang  
Indonesia  
Hewlett-Packard Sales (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd  
Bayan Lepas Free Trade Zone  
11900 Bayan Lepas  
Bandung  
P.T. Berca Hardayaperkasa  
Jalan Tengku Angkasa No. 33  
Bandung 40132  
Phone Number: (62-22) 250-8100  
Fax: (62-22) 250-6757  
Penang  
Phone Number: (60/4) 642-3502  
Fax: (60/4) 642-3511  
New Zealand  
Jakarta  
Hewlett-Packard New Zealand Ltd.  
186-190 Willis Street  
P.T. Berca Hardayaperkasa  
Jalan Abdul Muis No. 62  
Jakarta 10160-Indonesia  
Phone Number: (62/21) 380 0902  
Fax: (62/21) 381 2044  
Wellington  
Phone Number: 0800-738-378  
(international 64-4-802-6800)  
Fax: (64-4) 802-6881  
Korea, Republic of  
Pakistan  
Seoul  
Islamabad  
Hewlett-Packard Korea Ltd.  
Mushko Electronics (Pvt) Ltd.  
68-W Sama Plaza, Blue Area, G-7  
Islamabad 44000  
HP Korea House  
25-12 Yoido-dong  
Youngdeung po-ku  
Seoul 150-010  
Phone Number: (82/2)-769-0114  
Fax: (82/2) 784-7084  
Pakistan  
Phone Number: 92-51-828-459/810-950  
Fax: 92-51-816-190  
Telex: 54001 Muski Pk  
Taegu  
Karachi  
Hewlett-Packard Korea Ltd.  
18/F, Young Nam Tower B/D 111  
Shin Cheon-dong, Dong-Gu  
Taegu  
Phone Number: (82/53) 754-2666  
Fax: (82/53) 752-4696  
Mushko Electronics (Pvt) Ltd.  
Oosman Chambers  
Abdullah Haroon Road  
Karachi 74400  
Phone Number: 92-21-566-0490  
Fax: 92-21-566-0801  
Telex: 29094 MUSKO PK  
Taejeon  
Samsung  
Hewlett-Packard Korea Ltd.  
8/F Hyundai Bldg,  
1298 Doonsan-dong, Seo-gu  
Taejeon  
Phone Number: 82-42-480-2800  
Fax: 82-42-480-2828  
Philippines  
Hewlett-Packard Philippines Corporation  
9th Floor, Rufino Pacific Tower  
6784 Ayala Avenue  
Makati City 1229  
Phone Number: (63-2) 894-1451  
Fax: (63-2) 811-1080, 811-0635  
Online Sales: (63-2) 893-9959  
Malaysia  
Kuala Lumpur  
Hewlett-Packard Sales (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd  
Ground Floor, Wisma Cyclecarri  
288 Jalan Raja Laut  
50350 Kuala Lumpur  
Phone Number: 1-800-88-8848 Toll Free  
Fax: (60/3) 298-9157  
EN  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Singapore  
Japan  
Hewlett-Packard Singapore (Sales) Pte Ltd Aichi  
450 Alexandra Road  
Singapore 119960  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Nagoya Kokusai Center Bldg.  
1-47-1 Nakono Nakamura-ku, Nagoya-shi  
Aichi 450  
Phone Number: 65 275 3888  
Additional phone number(s):  
HP Direct: 1 800 292-8100  
Application Support: 65-374-4242  
Hardware Service Hotline: 65-375-8350  
Fax: 65 274 7887  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Nakane-Nissei Bldg.  
4-25-18 Nishi-machi, Toyota-shi  
Aichi 471  
Sri Lanka  
Akita  
Precision Technical Services (PVT) Ltd.  
No. 2, R.A. De Mel Mawatha  
Colombo 00500  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Nihonseimei Akita Chuodori Bldg.  
4-2-7 Nakadori, Akita-shi  
Akita 010  
Phone Number: (941) 597-860  
Fax: (941) 597-863  
Chiba  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
WBG Malibu East Bldg. 19F  
2-6 Nakase Mihama-ku, Chiba-shi  
Chiba 261-71  
Thailand  
Hewlett-Packard (Thailand) Ltd.  
23rd-25th floor Vibulthani Tower 2  
3199 Rama IV Road  
Fukuoka  
Klong Toey, Bangkok 10110  
Phone Number: (66-2) 661-3900-34  
Fax: (66-2) 661-3946  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Daisan Hakata-Kaisei Bldg.  
1-3-6 Hakataekiminami Hakata-ku,  
Fukuoka-shi  
Vietnam  
Fukuoka 812  
System Interlace  
39 Mai Hac De Street  
Hai Ba Trung District  
Hanoi  
Hiroshima  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Nissei-Heiwakoen Bldg.  
3-25 Nakajima-cho Naka-ku, Hiroshima-shi  
Hiroshima 730  
Vietnam  
Phone Number: 844-229-808/9  
Fax: 844-229-553  
Hokkaido  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Sumitomo-seimei  
Sapporo Chuo Bldg.  
1-1-14 Minaminijo-higashi Chuo-ku,  
Sapporo-shi  
Hokkaido 060  
Hyogo  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
1-3-2 Muroya Nishi-ku, Kobe-shi  
Hyogo 651-22  
182 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ibaraki  
Saitama  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Mito Yomiuri-Kaikan Bldg.  
2-4-2 Minami-machi, Mito-shi  
Ibaraki 310  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Mitsui-seimei Omiya  
Miyamachi Bldg. 2-96-1  
Miyamachi, Omiya-shi  
Saitama 330  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Tsukuba-Mitsui Bldg.  
1-6-1 Takezono, Tsukuba-shi  
Ibaraki 305  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Nissei-Kumagaya Bldg.  
2-42 Miya-machi, Kumagaya-shi  
Saitama 360  
Ishikawa  
Shizuoka  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Kanazawa MK Bldg.  
98-8 Sainen-machi, Kanazawa-shi  
Ishikawa 920  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Kawasei-Rinkyo Bldg.  
6-6 Hosojima-cho Hamamatsu-shi  
Shizuoka 435  
Kanagawa  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
3-2-2 Sakado  
Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi  
Kanagawa 213  
Tochigi  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Chiyodaseimei-Utsunomiya Bldg.  
2-3-1 Odori, Utsunomiya-shi  
Tochigi 320  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
9-32 Tamuracho, Atsugi-shi  
Kanagawa 243  
Tokyo  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
9-1 Takakura-cho, Hachioji-shi  
Tokyo 192-8510  
Kyoto  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Maeda SN Bldg.  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
NAF Bldg.  
3-8-20 Takaido-higashi, Suginami-ku  
Tokyo 168  
518 Akinono-cho Nijyo-Kudaru  
Karasuma, Nakagyo-ku  
Kyoto 604  
Miyagi  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Yamaguchi Bldg.  
1-1-31 Ichibancho Aoba-ku, Sendai-shi  
Miyagi 980  
Nagano  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Forum Honjo Bldg.  
2-4-1 Honjo, Matsumoto-shi  
Nagano 390  
Osaka  
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.  
Chuo Bldg.  
5-4-20 Nishinakajima  
Yodogawa-ku, Osaka-shi  
Osaka 532  
EN  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Israel  
Middle East and  
Africa  
Computation and Measurement Systems  
(CMS) Ltd.  
11, Hashlosha Street  
Tel-Aviv 67060  
Algeria  
Phone Number: 972 (03) 538-03-80  
Fax: 972 (03) 537-50-55  
Telex: 371234 HPCMS  
RTI Algeria  
26, Bis rue Mohammed Hadj-Ahmed  
(ex. Rue Jean Pierre Dinet)  
16035 Hydra  
Jordan  
Scientific & Medical Supplies Co.  
P.O. Box 1387  
Alger  
Algerie  
Phone Number: 213-2-606450  
Amman  
Phone Number: (962/6) 62-49-07  
Fax: (962/6) 62-82-58  
Telex: 21456 sabco jo  
Angola  
Handled by HP South Africa  
Bahrain  
Kuwait  
BAMTEC  
Al-Khaldiya Electronics & Electricals  
Equipment Co.  
P.O. Box 10373  
Capital centre  
Shop 116  
P.O. Box 830  
Safat 13009  
Road 1405  
Area 314  
Phone Number: (965) 48 13 049  
Fax: (965) 48 12 983  
Manama  
Phone Number: 9-73-275678  
Fax: 9-73-276669  
Telex: 8550 WAEL BN  
Lebanon  
Computer Information Systems C.I.S.  
Lebanon Street  
Chammas Bldg.  
P.O. Box 11-6274  
Dora-Beirut  
Egypt  
ORASCOM  
Onsi Sawiris & Co  
P.O. Box 1191  
160, 26th July Street  
Aguza/Cairo  
Phone Number: (961/1) 405-413  
Fax: (961/1) 601.906  
Tel/fax: (3579) 514-256 (Cyprus Based  
Line)  
Phone Number: (202) 3015287  
Fax: (202) 3442615  
Telex: 92768 orscm un  
Telex: 42309 chacis le  
Malawi  
Handled by HP South Africa  
Iran (Islamic Republic of)  
Evertech  
Mauritius  
Handled by HP South Africa  
11 bis, rue Toepffer  
1206 Geneve  
Phone Number: +41-22-346 92 92  
Fax: +41-22-346 86 91  
Telex: 421 787  
184 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Morocco  
Saudi Arabia  
SICOTEL  
Modern Electronics Establishment  
P.O. Box 22015  
Complexe des Habous  
Tour C, avenue des Far  
Casablanca 01  
Prince Musad Ibn Abdulaziz St.  
Riyadh 11495  
Phone Number: +212 (02) 31-22-70  
Fax: +212 (02) 31-65-45  
Telex: 27604  
Phone Number: (966/1) 476-3030  
Fax: (966/1) 476-2570  
Additional Fax: (966/1) 476-7649  
cable ROUFKO  
Mozambique  
Handled by  
Modern Electronics Establishment  
P.O. Box 22015  
HP South Africa  
al Nimer Building  
Riyadh 11495  
Phone Number: (01) 4624266  
Fax: (01) 4624404  
Additional Fax: (966/1) 476-7649  
Namibia  
Handled by  
HP South Africa  
South Africa  
Nigeria  
Hewlett-Packard South Africa (Pty.) Ltd.  
P.O. Box 120, Howard Place  
7450 Cape Town  
Management Information Systems Co. Ltd.  
3 Gerrard Road  
P.O. Box 53386  
Ikoyi, Lagos  
Phone Number: 27 21 658-6100  
Fax: 27 21 685-3785  
Phone Number: 234-1-2691307  
Fax: 234-1-2692755  
Telex: 23582 DATEC NG  
Hewlett-Packard South Africa (Pty.) Ltd.  
Private Bag  
Wendywood 2148  
Phone Number: 27-11-806 1173  
Fax: 27-11-806 1213  
Oman  
IMTAC LLC  
P.O. Box 51196  
Al Hayek Street  
Mina al Fahal  
Muscat  
Phone Number: (968) 707-727, (968) 707-  
723  
Fax: (968) 796-639, (968) 797-709  
Tunisia  
Precision Electronique  
5, rue de Chypre-Mutuelle Ville  
1002 Tunis Belvedere  
Phone Number: (216/1) 785-037  
Additional phone number(s): (216/1) 890-  
672  
Fax: (216/1) 780-241  
Telex: (0409) 18238 TELEC TN  
Qatar  
Qatar Datamations Systems  
Al Ahed Building, 5th floor  
Al Muthof Street  
Doha  
Phone Number: 974/43.99.00  
Fax: 974/43.21.54  
Telex: 4833  
EN  
Worldwide country/region sales and service offices 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
United Arab Emirates  
Emitac Ltd.  
Block RBS Arenco Bldg.  
Zabel Road  
P.O. Box 8391  
Dubai  
Phone Number: (971/4) 37-75-91  
Fax: (971/4) 37-08-99  
Emitac Ltd.  
P.O. Box 2711  
Abu Dhabi  
Phone Number: (971/2) 77-04-19  
Fax: (971/2) 72-30-58  
Zambia  
Handled by HP South Africa  
Zimbabwe  
Handled by HP South Africa  
186 Chapter 5 - Service and support  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
A
Overview  
This appendix includes:  
G
G
G
paper specifications  
printer specifications  
product compatibility matrix  
EN  
Overview 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper specifications  
HP LaserJet printers produce excellent print quality. This printer  
accepts a variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper (including  
recycled paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies, and custom-size  
paper. Paper properties such as weight, grain, and moisture content  
are important factors affecting printer performance and output quality.  
The printer can use a variety of paper and other print media in  
accordance with the guidelines in this manual. Paper that does not  
meet these guidelines may cause the following problems:  
G
G
G
poor print quality  
increased paper jams  
premature wear on the printer, requiring repair  
Note  
For best results, use only high quality media, such as HP brand paper  
and print media. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the  
use of other brands. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot  
influence or control their quality.  
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this manual and  
stillnotproducesatisfactoryresults. Thismightbetheresultofimproper  
handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other  
variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.  
Before purchasing a large quantity of paper, make sure it meets the  
requirements specified in this user guide and in the HP LaserJet Printer  
Family Paper Specification Guide. (To order the guide, see “Ordering  
information” on page 22, or visit the supplies website at  
http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.) Always test paper before purchasing  
a large quantity.  
CAUTION  
Using paper outside HP specifications may cause problems for the  
printer, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-  
Packard warranty or service agreements.  
188 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supported sizes and weights of paper  
Supported sizes and weights of paper (one-sided printing) - tray 1a  
Size  
Dimensionsb  
Weight  
Capacityc  
Paper (custom  
minimum size)  
76 by 127 mm  
(3 by 5 in)  
2
2
60 to 199 g/m  
(16 to 53 lb)  
100 sheets of 75 g/m  
(20 lb) paper  
Paper (maximum 216 by 356 mm  
size)  
(8.5 by 14 in)  
Thickness:  
Transparencies  
0.099 to 0.114 mm  
0.0039 to 0.0045 in  
50 transparencies  
Same as minimum  
and maximum paper  
sizes listed above.  
Thickness:  
0.127 mm to 0.178 mm  
(0.005 to 0.007 in)  
Labels  
50 labels  
2
75 to 105 g/m  
Envelopes  
10 envelopes  
(20 to 28 lb)  
a. See “Supported sizes and weights of paper - duplex printing accessory  
(duplexer)” on page 191 for two-sided printing.  
b. The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software  
for supported sizes. To print custom-size paper, see “Printing cards, custom-  
size, and heavy paper” on page 63.  
c. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and  
environmental conditions.  
EN  
Paper specifications 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supported sizes and weights of paper - trays 2, 3, and 4  
Size  
Dimensionsa  
Weight  
Capacityb  
216 by 279 mm  
(8.5 by 11 in)  
Letter  
A4  
210 by 297 mm  
(8.3 by 11.7 in)  
191 by 267 mm  
(7.3 by 10.5 in)  
Executive  
Executive (JIS)  
(custom )  
216 by 330 mm  
(8.5 by 13 in)  
c
197 by 273 mm  
(7.75 by 10.75 in)  
c
16K (custom )  
2
500 sheets of 75 g/m  
(20 lb) paper  
2
60 to 105 g/m  
(16 to 28 lb)  
216 by 356 mm  
(8.5 by 14 in)  
Legal  
50 transparencies  
176 by 250 mm  
(6.9 by 9.9 in)  
c
B5 (ISO) (custom )  
182 by 257 mm  
(7.2 by 10 in)  
B5 (JIS)  
A5  
148 by 210 mm  
(5.8 by 8.2 in)  
148 by 210 mm  
to 216 by 356 mm  
(5.8 by 8.2 in  
c
Custom  
to 8.5 by 14 in)  
a. The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software  
for supported sizes.  
b. Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness and  
environmental conditions.  
c. To print custom-size paper, see “Printing cards, custom-size, and  
heavy paper” on page 63.  
190 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supported sizes and weights of paper - optional envelope feeder  
Size  
Dimensions  
Weight  
Capacity  
Monarch  
(#7-3/4)  
98.4 by 190.5 mm  
(3.88 by 7.50 in)  
Commercial 10  
(#10)  
104.9 by 241.3 mm  
(4.13 by 9.5 in)  
2
110 by 220 mm  
(4.33 by 8.66 in)  
75 to 105 g/m  
(20 to 28 lb)  
DL ISO  
C5 ISO  
B5 ISO  
75 envelopes  
162 by 229 mm  
(6.38 by 9.02 in)  
176 by 250 mm  
(6.93 by 9.84 in)  
Supported sizes and weights of paper - duplex printing  
accessory (duplexer)  
Size  
Dimensions  
Weight  
216 by 279 mm  
(8.5 by 11 in)  
Letter  
A4  
210 by 297 mm  
(8.3 by 11.7 in)  
2
184 by 267 mm  
(7.3 by 10.5 in)  
60 to 105 g/m  
(16 to 28 lb)  
Executive  
Legal  
216 by 356 mm  
(8.5 by 14 in)  
182 by 257 mm  
(7.2 by 10 in)  
B5 (JIS)  
EN  
Paper specifications 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Supported types of paper  
The printer supports the following types of paper:  
G
G
G
G
G
G
plain  
G
G
G
G
G
G
preprinted  
letterhead  
prepunched  
bond  
transparency  
labels  
recycled  
color  
card stock  
rough  
user-defined (5 types)  
Guidelines for using paper  
For best results, use conventional 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) paper.  
Make sure the paper is of good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears,  
spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges.  
If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or  
recycled), check the label on the package of paper.  
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to  
the printer.  
Symptom  
Problem with paper  
Solution  
Too moist, too rough, too  
smooth, or embossed.  
Ragged edges.  
Try another kind of paper,  
between 100-250 Sheffield,  
4-6% moisture content.  
Poor print quality or toner  
adhesion.  
Faulty paper lot.  
Store paper flat in its  
moisture-proof wrapping.  
Dropouts, jamming, curl.  
Stored improperly.  
Use lighter paper.  
Open the rear output bin.  
Use less smooth paper.  
Increased gray background  
shading.  
Too heavy.  
Too smooth.  
Open the rear output bin.  
Use long-grain paper.  
Store paper in a drier  
environment.  
Too moist, wrong grain  
direction or short-grain  
construction.  
Excessive curl.  
Problems with feeding.  
192 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Note  
Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature inks,  
such as those used in some types of thermography.  
Do not use raised letterhead.  
The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make  
sure that any colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are  
compatible with the printer’s temperature of 230° C (446° F) for  
0.05 second.  
Avoid using paper that has been damaged due to having already been  
used in a printer or copier. (Do not print on both sides of envelopes,  
transparencies, or labels.)  
EN  
Paper specifications 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper weight equivalence table  
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight  
specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine  
the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight,  
locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the  
row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb.  
Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade.  
U.S.  
postcard  
thickness  
(mm)  
U.S.  
bond  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S. text/  
book  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
cover  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
Bristol  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
index  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
tag  
weight  
(lb)  
a
Metric  
weight  
2
(g/m )  
16  
17  
20  
21  
24  
27  
28  
29  
32  
36  
39  
40  
43  
45  
47  
51  
53  
54  
58  
65  
41  
43  
22  
24  
28  
30  
33  
37  
39  
41  
44  
50  
55  
55  
60  
63  
65  
70  
74  
75  
80  
90  
27  
29  
34  
36  
41  
45  
49  
50  
55  
62  
67  
68  
74  
77  
80  
86  
90  
93  
98  
111  
33  
35  
37  
39  
60  
64  
b
50  
42  
46  
75  
54  
44  
49  
80  
b
60  
50  
55  
90  
68  
55  
61  
100  
105  
110  
120  
135  
148  
150  
163  
170  
176  
190  
199  
203  
216  
244  
b
70  
58  
65  
74  
61  
68  
b
80  
67  
74  
90  
75  
83  
0.18  
0.20  
0.23  
100  
101  
110  
115  
119  
128  
134  
137  
146  
165  
82  
91  
83  
92  
90  
100  
104  
108  
117  
122  
125  
133  
150  
94  
97  
105  
110  
113  
120  
135  
194 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
U.S.  
postcard  
thickness  
(mm)  
U.S.  
bond  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S. text/  
book  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
cover  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
Bristol  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
index  
weight  
(lb)  
U.S.  
tag  
weight  
(lb)  
a
Metric  
weight  
2
(g/m )  
66  
67  
70  
72  
169  
171  
178  
183  
92  
94  
114  
115  
120  
123  
138  
140  
146  
150  
154  
155  
162  
166  
250  
253  
264  
271  
98  
100  
a. U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.  
b. Text and book grades actually calculate out to 51, 61, 71, and 81, but are  
standardized to book/text weights of 50, 60, 70, and 80.  
EN  
Paper specifications 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Labels  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels recommended for use  
in laser printers.  
If you have problems printing labels, use tray 1 and open the rear output  
bin.  
Do not print on the same sheet of labels more than once—peeling and  
adhesive contamination might result.  
Label construction  
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:  
G
G
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 230° C  
(446° F), the printer’s maximum temperature.  
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between  
them. Labels can peel off sheets with spaces between the labels,  
causing serious jams.  
G
G
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than  
13 mm (0.5 in) of curl in any direction.  
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other  
indications of separation.  
To print sheets of labels, see “Printing labels” on page 61.  
Transparencies  
Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 230° C  
(446° F), the printer’s maximum temperature. Close the rear output  
bin to print transparencies to the top output bin.  
If you have problems printing transparencies, use tray 1. Be sure to  
remove each transparency from the output tray to keep them from  
sticking together.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies recommended  
for use in laser printers.  
To print transparencies, see “Printing transparencies” on page 62.  
196 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Envelopes  
Envelope construction  
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary  
considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box  
from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes  
depends upon the quality of the envelopes.  
When selecting envelopes, consider the components listed below.  
Many envelope manufacturers are now making envelopes optimized  
for laser printers.  
G
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should be 75 to  
105 g/m2 (20 to 28 lb), or jamming may result.  
G
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less  
than 6 mm (0.25 in) curl, and should not contain air. (Envelopes  
that trap air may cause problems.)  
G
G
G
Condition: Make sure envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Sizes in tray 1: From 76 by 127 mm (3 by 5 in) to 216 by 356 mm  
(8.5 by 14 in).  
Sizes in the optional envelope feeder: From Monarch (#7-3/4)  
(98.4 by 190.5 mm, or 3.88 by 7.50 in) to B5 (ISO) (176 by 250  
mm, or 6.93 by 9.84 in).  
If you do not have an optional envelope feeder, always print  
envelopes from tray 1 (see “Printing envelopes” on page 55). To print  
envelopes with the optional envelope feeder, see “Feeding envelopes  
automatically (optional envelope feeder)” on page 57. If envelopes  
curl, try opening the rear output bin.  
Envelopes with double-side-seams  
Double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of  
the envelope rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more  
likely to wrinkle unless properly constructed. Be sure the seam  
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.  
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap  
that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat  
and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and strips might cause  
wrinkling, creasing, or jams.  
EN  
Paper specifications 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Envelope margins  
The following table gives typical address margins for a Commercial  
#10 or DL envelope.  
Type of address  
Return address  
Top margin  
15 mm (0.6 in)  
51 mm (2 in)  
Left margin  
15 mm (0.6 in)  
89 mm (3.5 in)  
Delivery address  
Note  
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm  
(0.6 in) from the edges of the envelope.  
Envelope storage  
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to good print quality.  
Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope,  
creating an air bubble, then the envelope may wrinkle during printing.  
Card stock and heavy paper  
Many types of card stock can be printed from tray 1, including index  
cards and postcards. Some card stock performs better than others  
because its construction is better suited for feeding through a laser  
printer.  
For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than  
199 g/m2 (53 lb) in tray 1 or 105 g/m2 (28 lb) in other trays. Paper that  
is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams,  
poor toner fusing, poor print quality, or excessive mechanical wear.  
Note  
Printing on heavier paper may be possible if the tray is not filled to  
capacity, and short grain paper with a smoothness rating of 100 to 180  
Sheffield is used.  
198 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Card stock construction  
G
Smoothness: Card stock should have smoothness in the range  
of 100 to 180 Sheffield.  
G
Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm  
(0.2 in) of curl. It should be short grain paper to improve feeding  
and reduce wear on the printer.  
G
G
Condition: Make sure card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Sizes: Use only card stock within the following size ranges:  
• minimum: 76 by 127 mm (3 by 5 in)  
• maximum: 216 by 356 mm (8.5 by 14 in)  
Before loading card stock in tray 1, make sure it is regular in shape  
and not damaged. Also, make sure the cards are not stuck together.  
Card stock guidelines  
G
If cards curl or jam, try printing from tray 1 and opening the rear  
output bin.  
G
Set margins at least 6 mm (0.24 in) away from the edges of the  
paper.  
EN  
Paper specifications 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer specifications  
Physical dimensions  
1043 mm (41.1 in)  
full length (trays and rear output bin open)  
HP LaserJet  
4100/4100N/  
4100TN/4100DTN  
390 mm (15.4 in)  
HP LaserJet  
4100/4100N  
475 mm  
(18.7 in)  
top cover open  
345 mm  
(13.6 in)  
top cover closed  
506 mm (19.9 in)  
trays and rear output bin closed  
HP LaserJet  
4100TN/4100DTN  
595 mm  
(23.4 in)  
top cover open  
465 mm  
(18.3 in)  
top cover closed  
HP LaserJet 4100TN  
trays and rear output bin closed  
506 mm (19.9 in)  
565 mm (22.2 in)  
HP LaserJet 4100DTN  
trays and rear output bin closed  
200 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printer weight (without toner cartridge)  
HP LaserJet 4100/4100N printers  
HP LaserJet 4100TN printer  
HP LaserJet 4100DTN printer  
18 kg (39 lb)  
25 kg (55 lb)  
28 kg (62 lb)  
Environmental specifications  
Electrical specifications  
Power consumption (average, in watts)  
Printer model  
Printing Standby PowerSave  
Off  
0
HP LaserJet 4100  
450  
450  
450  
450  
17  
18  
19  
20  
17  
18  
19  
20  
HP LaserJet 4100N  
HP LaserJet 4100TN  
HP LaserJet 4100DTN  
0
0
0
Values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/lj4100  
for current information.  
Minimum recommended circuit capacity  
100 to 127 Volt  
220 to 240 Volt  
10 amps  
5 amps  
Power requirements (acceptable line voltage)  
100 to 127 Volt  
220 to 240 Volt  
50/60 Hz  
50/60 Hz  
EN  
Printer specifications 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Acoustic emissions (per ISO 9296)  
Printer state  
Sound power levela  
Bystander position  
Printing, 25 pages per  
minute (ppm)  
L
= 6.6 bels (A)  
52 L  
decibels (A)  
Wad  
pAm  
PowerSave  
L = 4.1 bels (A)  
wad  
26 L  
decibels (A)  
pAm  
a. You might want to install printers with sound power LWad>=6.3  
bels (A) or more in a separate room or cubicle.  
General specifications  
Operating temperature  
Relative humidity  
10 to 32° C (50 to 91° F)  
20 to 80%  
Up to 25 ppm, letter-size paper  
Up to 24 ppm, A4-size paper  
Speed, in pages per minute (ppm)  
Expandable memory  
Up to 256 MB total, combining  
standard and accessory memory  
DIMMs  
202 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Product compatibility matrix  
Product compatibility matrix  
HP LaserJet printer  
4000 series 4050 series 4100 series  
Product  
Product  
number  
Envelope feeder  
C4122A  
C8053A  
G
G
G
G
G
G
Duplex printing accessory  
(duplexer)  
C4123A  
C8054A  
G
G
G
G
Toner cartridges  
6,000 pages  
10,000 pages  
6,000 pages  
C4127A  
C4127X  
C8061A  
C8061X  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
10,000 pages  
Paper trays  
500-sheet paper feeder and  
tray  
500-sheet paper feeder and  
tray  
500-sheet universal  
replacement tray  
500-sheet universal  
replacement tray  
500-sheet standard  
replacement tray  
250-sheet standard  
replacement tray  
a
a
b
C4124A  
C8055A  
C4125A  
C8056A  
C3122A  
C4126A  
G
G
G
a
a
G
G
GG  
a
a
b
G
G
G
a
a
G
G
G
c
c
c
G
G
G
a
a
G
G
a. “A5” size is detected as “custom” size.  
b. “A5” size is detected as “custom” size. Larger  
“custom” sizes might be detected as “A5” size.  
c. Supports only Letter, A4, and Legal sizes.  
EN  
Product compatibility matrix 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Product compatibility matrix (continued)  
HP LaserJet printer  
Product  
Product  
number  
4000 series 4050 series 4100 series  
Memory  
4 MB EDO DIMM  
8 MB EDO DIMM  
C4135A  
C4136A  
C4137A  
C4140A  
C4141A  
C7842A  
C4142A  
C7843A  
C7844A  
C4143A  
C7845A  
C3913A  
C7846A  
C9121A  
C4286A  
C4287A  
G
G
G
16 MB EDO DIMM  
4 MB SDRAM DIMM  
8 MB SDRAM DIMM  
8 MB SDRAM DIMM  
16 MB SDRAM DIMM  
16 MB SDRAM DIMM  
24 MB SDRAM DIMM  
32 MB SDRAM DIMM  
32 MB SDRAM DIMM  
64 MB SDRAM DIMM  
64 MB SDRAM DIMM  
128 MB SDRAM DIMM  
2 MB flash DIMM  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
4 MB flash DIMM  
Font DIMMs  
Traditional Chinese font  
DIMM (8 MB Asian ROM)  
Simplified Chinese font DIMM  
(8 MB Asian ROM)  
Korean font DIMM (8 MB  
Asian ROM)  
C4292A  
C4293A  
D4838A  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Jet Direct EIO cards  
Ethernet RJ-45 only  
Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC,  
LocalTalk  
J3110A  
J3111A  
G
G
G
G
G
G
Token Ring  
10/100Base-TX  
USB, LocalTalk, and Serial  
J4167A  
J4169A  
J4135A  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Fast Infrared Receiver (FIR)  
pod  
C4103A  
G
G
EIO hard disk  
C2985B  
G
G
G
Preventative maintenance  
kits, user installable  
(consumable)  
110V kit  
220V kit  
110V kit  
C7851A  
C7852A  
C8057A  
C8058A  
G
G
G
G
G
G
220V kit  
204 Appendix A - Specifications  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control panel menus  
B
Overview  
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer  
through the printer driver or software application. This is the most  
convenient way to control the printer, and will override the printer  
control panel settings. See the help files associated with the software,  
or for more information on accessing the printer driver, see “Access  
the Windows printer driver” on page 36.  
You can also control the printer by changing settings in the printer’s  
control panel. Use the control panel to access printer features not  
supported by the printer driver or software application.  
Control panel menu map  
You can print a menu map from the control panel that shows the  
current printer configuration (see “To print a control panel menu map”  
on page 32). This appendix lists all the items and possible values for  
the printer.  
Some menus or menu items appear only when certain options are  
installed in the printer. For example, the Quick Copy Jobs menu  
appears only if the printer contains a hard disk accessory.  
EN  
Overview 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Quick Copy Jobs Menu  
This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s  
hard disk accessory. The user can print or delete these jobs from the  
control panel. See “Job retention features” on page 72 for more  
information about using this menu.  
Note  
This menu appears only if you have a hard disk accessory installed and  
quick copy jobs are stored on it.  
Quick Copy Jobs Menu  
Item  
Value  
Explanation  
The name of the person who owns the quick  
copy job.  
[JOBNAME]  
1 to 999  
DELETE  
Thenumberofadditionalcopiestheuserwants  
to print.  
COPIES=1  
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies  
of the job.  
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard  
disk accessory.  
206 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Private/Stored Jobs Menu  
This menu provides a list of the stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk  
accessory. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control  
panel. See “Printing a private job” on page 76 and “Storing a print job”  
on page 78 for more information about using this menu.  
Note  
This menu appears only if you have a hard disk accessory installed and  
there are private or stored jobs on it.  
Private/Stored Jobs Menu  
Item  
Value  
Explanation  
The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard  
[JOBNAME]  
disk accessory.  
To print the job, the user must enter the  
Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned  
to the job in the driver.  
PIN:0000  
COPIES=1  
1to 999  
DELETE  
The number of copies the user wants to print.  
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies  
of the job.  
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard  
disk accessory.  
EN  
Private/Stored Jobs Menu 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Information Menu  
This menu contains printer information pages that give details about  
the printer and its configuration. To print an information page, scroll to  
the desired page and press SELECT.  
Information Menu  
Item  
Explanation  
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the control  
panel menu items. For more information, see “Checking the printer  
configuration” on page 151.  
PRINT  
MENU MAP  
The configuration page shows the printer’s current configuration. If  
an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet 4100N/  
4100TN/4100DTNprinters), aJetDirectconfigurationpagewillprint  
out as well. For more information, see “Configuration page” on  
page 152.  
PRINT  
CONFIGURATION  
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the  
PRINT  
printer. For more information, see “PCL or PS font list” on page 156.  
PCL FONT LIST  
The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the  
PRINT  
printer. For more information, see “PCL or PS font list” on page 156.  
PS FONT LIST  
This item appears only when a mass storage device (such as an  
optional flash DIMM or hard disk accessory) containing a  
PRINT  
FILE DIRECTORY  
recognized file system is installed in the printer. The file directory  
shows information for all installed mass storage devices. For more  
information, see “Printer memory and expansion” on page 229.  
The event log lists printer events or errors.  
PRINT  
EVENT LOG  
This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the  
control panel display. Press -VALUE+ to scroll through the event log  
entries.  
SHOW  
EVENT LOG  
The usage page shows the quantity of pages printed, as well as the  
paper source used. It also reflects the number of one-sided versus  
two-sided pages.  
PRINT  
USAGE PAGE  
Note  
This item will only show in the Information Menu if the hard disk  
accessory is installed in the printer. This item will generate a page  
containing information that can be used for accounting purposes.  
208 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Information Menu (continued)  
Item  
Explanation  
The supplies status page shows toner cartridge information,  
statistics on the total number of pages and jobs processed, toner  
cartridge manufacture date, serial number, page counts, and  
maintenance information.  
PRINT  
SUPPLIES STATUS  
The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is  
working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper.  
PRINT  
PAPER PATH TEST  
Choosetheinputtray, outputbin, duplexer(ifavailable), andnumber  
of copies.  
EN  
Information Menu 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper Handling Menu  
When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the  
control panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper  
from the printer driver or software application. For more information,  
see “Printing by type and size of paper (locking trays)” on page 70.  
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be  
accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the  
appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application  
settings override control panel settings. For more information, see  
“Using features in the printer driver” on page 65.  
Paper Handling Menu  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
For supported  
paper sizes, see  
This item appears only when the optional  
envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to  
ENVELOPE FEEDER  
SIZE=COM10  
“Supportedsizes correspond with the envelope size currently  
and weights of  
paper” on  
loaded in the envelope feeder.  
page 189.  
For supported  
paper types, see  
“Supported  
types of paper”  
on page 192.  
This item appears only when the optional  
envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to  
correspond with the envelope type currently  
loaded in the envelope feeder.  
ENVELOPE FEEDER  
TYPE=PLAIN  
Determine how the printer will use tray 1.  
TRAY 1 MODE=  
FIRST  
FIRST  
CASSETTE  
FIRST: If paper is loaded in tray 1, the printer  
will pull paper from that tray first.  
CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to  
tray 1 using the TRAY 1 SIZEoption (the next  
item in this menu when TRAY 1  
MODE=CASSETTE). Thisallowstray1tobeused  
as a reserved tray.  
For more information, see “Customizing tray 1  
operation” on page 69.  
For supported  
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE=  
TRAY 1 SIZE=  
LETTER  
paper sizes, see CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with  
“Supportedsizes the paper size currently loaded in tray 1.  
and weights of  
paper” on  
page 189.  
210 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Paper Handling Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
For supported  
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE=  
TRAY 1 TYPE=  
PLAIN  
paper types, see CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with  
“Supported  
the paper type currently loaded in tray 1.  
types of paper”  
on page 192.  
For supported  
paper types, see  
“Supported  
Set the value to correspond with the paper type  
currently loaded in tray 2.  
TRAY 2 TYPE=  
PLAIN  
types of paper”  
on page 192.  
For supported  
paper types, see  
“Supported  
types of paper”  
on page 192.  
This item appears only when an optional third  
paper tray is installed. Set the value to  
correspond with the paper type currently  
loaded in tray 3.  
TRAY 3 TYPE=  
PLAIN  
For supported  
paper types, see  
“Supported  
types of paper”  
on page 192.  
This item appears only when an optional fourth  
paper tray is installed. Set the value to  
correspond with the paper type currently  
loaded in tray 4.  
TRAY 4 TYPE=  
PLAIN  
Feed the paper manually from tray 1, rather  
than automatically from a tray. When  
MANUAL FEED=OFF  
OFF  
ON  
MANUAL FEED=ONand tray 1 is empty, the  
printer goes offline when it receives a print job  
and displays MANUALLY FEED[PAPER SIZE].  
For more information, see “Manually feeding  
paper from tray 1” on page 71.  
This item appears only when an optional  
duplexerisinstalled. SetthevaluetoONtoprint  
on both sides (duplex) or OFFto print on one  
side (simplex) of a sheet of paper.  
DUPLEX=OFF  
OFF  
ON  
For more information, see “Printing both sides  
of paper (optional duplexer)” on page 49.  
This item appears only when an optional  
duplexer is installed and the duplex option is  
on. Choose the binding edge when duplexing  
(printing on both sides of paper).  
BINDING=  
LONG EDGE  
LONG EDGE  
SHORT EDGE  
For more information, see “Layout options for  
printing both sides of paper” on page 52.  
EN  
Paper Handling Menu 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Paper Handling Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Select SLOWwhen alternately printing  
envelopes (or small paper) and standard paper  
sizes and print problems appear.  
SMALL PAPER  
SPEED=NORMAL  
NORMAL  
SLOW  
Be sure to return the speed to NORMALwhen  
finished.  
When slow is selected, the printer briefly  
pauses between pages to reduce a repeating  
image defect (see “Repeating image” on  
page 134).  
For more information, see “Printing envelopes”  
on page 55.  
Configurethefusermodeassociatedwitheach  
paper type. (This is only necessary if you are  
experiencing loose toner problems printing on  
certain paper types.)  
CONFIGURE FUSER  
MODE MENU=NO  
NO  
YES  
NO: The fuser mode menu items are not  
accessible.  
YES: Additional items appear (see below).  
Note  
To see the default fuser mode for each paper  
type, select YES, scroll back to the Information  
Menu, and print a menu map (see “Information  
Menu” on page 208).  
This item appears only when CONFIGURE  
FUSER MODE MENU=YES. Most paper types are  
set to NORMALfuser mode by default. The  
exceptions are as follows:  
[TYPE]=  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
LOW  
HIGH 1  
HIGH 2  
ROUGH=HIGH 1  
TRANSPARENCY=LOW  
NORMALfuser mode provides a fuser  
temperature for optimum results on most  
typical papers.  
LOWfuser mode provides a lower temperature,  
which can help reduce curl on light-weight  
paper. However, the toner might not adhere as  
well to the page.  
HIGH 1fuser mode provides a higher fuser  
temperature. HIGH1should be used with  
rough-texturedorheavypaperifyouarehaving  
trouble with toner adhering to the page.  
HIGH 2fuser mode uses the same higher  
temperatureasHIGH 1, but it also slowsprinter  
throughput, which creates the best fusing for  
very rough paper. HIGH 2is available only for  
A4, Letter, and Legal sizes.  
212 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing Menu  
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software  
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is  
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override  
control panel settings. For more information, see “Using features in  
the printer driver” on page 65.  
Printing Menu  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
1 to 999  
Set the default number of copies by  
selecting any number from 1 to 999. Press  
-VALUE+ once to change the setting by  
increments of 1, or hold down -VALUE+ to  
scroll by increments of 10.  
COPIES=1  
Note  
It is best to set the number of copies from  
the printer driver or software application.  
(Driver and software settings override  
control panel settings.)  
PAPER SIZE=  
LETTER  
For supported paper  
sizes, see  
“Supported sizes  
and weights of  
Set the default image size for paper and  
envelopes. (The item name will change  
from paper to envelope as you scroll  
through the available sizes.)  
(110V printers)  
or  
paper” on page 189.  
PAPER SIZE=  
A4  
(220V printers)  
and  
ENVELOPE=  
COM10  
(110V printers)  
or  
ENVELOPE=  
DL  
(220V printers)  
NO: The custom paper menu items are not  
accessible.  
CONFIGURE CUSTOM NO  
PAPER=NO YES  
YES: The custom paper menu items appear  
(see below).  
EN  
Printing Menu 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Printing Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
This item appears only when CONFIGURE  
CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Select the unit of  
measurement for the custom paper size.  
UNIT OF  
INCHES  
MEASURE=INCHES  
(110V printers)  
MILLIMETERS  
or  
MILLIMETERS  
(220V printers)  
X DIMENSION=  
8.50 INCHES  
(110V printers)  
For supported paper  
sizes, see  
“Supported sizes  
and weights of  
This item appears only when CONFIGURE  
CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Use -VALUE+ and  
SELECT to select the dimension to be fed  
into the printer (short edge) for custom  
or  
paper” on page 189. paper size.  
216 MILLIMETERS  
(220V printers)  
Y DIMENSION=  
14.00 INCHES  
(110V printers)  
For supported paper  
sizes, see  
“Supported sizes  
and weights of  
This item appears only when CONFIGURE  
CUSTOM PAPER=YES. Use -VALUE+ and  
SELECT to select the other dimension (long  
edge) for custom paper size.  
or  
paper” on page 189.  
356 MILLIMETERS  
(220V printers)  
Determinethedefaultorientationofprinton  
the page.  
ORIENTATION=  
PORTRAIT  
PORTRAIT  
LANDSCAPE  
Note  
It is bestto setthe page orientation fromthe  
printer driver or software application.  
(Driver and software settings override  
control panel settings.)  
FORM LENGTH=  
60 LINES  
5 to 128  
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for  
default paper size. Press -VALUE+ once to  
change the setting by increments of 1, or  
hold down -VALUE+ to scroll by increments  
of 10.  
(110V printers)  
or  
64 LINES  
(220V printers)  
INTERNAL  
SOFT  
INTERNAL: Internal fonts.  
SOFT: Permanent soft fonts.  
PCL FONT SOURCE=  
INTERNAL  
SLOT 1, 2,or 3  
SLOT 1, 2,or 3: Fonts stored in one of  
the three DIMM slots.  
Note  
It is best to set the font source from the  
printer driver or software application.  
(Driver and software settings override  
control panel settings.)  
214 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Printing Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
0to 999  
The printer assigns a number to each font  
andliststhemonthePCLfontlist(see“PCL  
or PS font list” on page 156). The font  
number appears in the Font # column of the  
printout.  
PCL FONT NUMBER=  
0
Note  
It is best to set the font number from the  
printer driver or software application.  
(Driver and software settings override  
control panel settings.)  
0.44 to 99.99  
This item might not appear, depending on  
the font selected. Press -VALUE+ once to  
change setting by increments of 0.01 for  
pitch, or hold down -VALUE+ to scroll by  
increments of 1.  
PCL FONT PITCH=  
10.00  
Note  
It is best to set the font pitch from the printer  
driver or software application. (Driver and  
software settings override control panel  
settings.)  
4.00 to 999.75  
This item might not appear, depending on  
the font selected. Press -VALUE+ once to  
change setting by increments of 0.25 for  
point size, or hold down -VALUE+ to scroll  
by increments of 1.  
PCL FONT POINT  
SIZE=12.00  
Note  
It is best to set the font point from the printer  
driver or software application. (Driver and  
software settings override control panel  
settings.)  
PC-8  
Select any one of several available symbol  
sets from the printer’s control panel. A  
symbol set is a unique grouping of all the  
characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is  
recommended for line draw characters.  
PCL SYMBOL SET=  
PC-8  
many others  
Note  
It is best to set the symbol set from the  
printer driver or software application.  
(Driver and software settings override  
control panel settings.)  
EN  
Printing Menu 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Select the version of Courier font to use:  
COURIER FONT=  
REGULAR  
REGULAR  
DARK  
REGULAR: The internal Courier font  
available on the HP LaserJet 4 series  
printers.  
DARK:TheinternalCourierfontavailableon  
the HP LaserJet III series printers.  
Both fonts are not available at the same  
time.  
The Wide A4 setting changes the number  
ofcharactersthatcanbeprintedonasingle  
line of A4 paper.  
WIDE A4=NO  
NO  
YES  
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be  
printed on one line.  
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be  
printed on one line.  
Choose YESto print on letter size paper  
whenanA4jobissent, butnoA4sizepaper  
isloaded in the printer (orto printon A4 size  
paper when a letter job is sent, but no letter  
paper is loaded in the printer).  
OVERRIDE  
NO  
A4/LETTER=NO  
YES  
Select ONto append a carriage return to  
each line feed encountered in backward-  
compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job  
control). Some environments, such as  
UNIX, indicateanewlineusingonlytheline  
feed control code. This option allows the  
user to append the required carriage return  
to each line feed.  
APPEND CR TO LF=  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
216 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Print Quality Menu  
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software  
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is  
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override  
control panel settings. For more information, see “Using features in  
the printer driver” on page 65.  
Print Quality Menu  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Select the resolution from the values listed  
below. All values print at the printer’s full speed  
(24 ppm).  
RESOLUTION=  
FASTRES 1200  
300  
600  
FASTRES 1200  
PRORES 1200  
300: Produces draft print quality and can be  
used for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III  
family of printers.  
600: Produces high print quality for text and  
can be used for compatibility with the  
HP LaserJet 4 family of printers.  
FASTRES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi print  
quality for fast, high quality printing of business  
text and graphics.  
PRORES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi printing for  
best quality of graphic images.  
Note  
It is best to change the resolution from the  
printer driver or software application. (Driver  
and software settings override control panel  
settings.)  
Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement  
technology (REt) setting to produce print with  
smooth angles, curves, and edges.  
RET=MEDIUM  
OFF  
LIGHT  
MEDIUM  
DARK  
REt does not affect print quality when the print  
resolution is set to ProRes 1200. All other print  
resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit  
from REt.  
Note  
It is best to change the REt setting from the  
printer driver or software application. (Driver  
and software settings override control panel  
settings.)  
EN  
Print Quality Menu 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Print Quality Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Turn EconoMode on (to save toner) or off (for  
high quality).  
ECONOMODE=OFF  
OFF  
ON  
EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by  
reducing the amount of toner on the printed  
page.  
Caution  
HP does not recommend full-time use of  
EconoMode. (If EconoMode is used full-time, it  
is possible that the toner supply will outlast the  
mechanical parts in the toner cartridge.)  
Note  
It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the  
printer driver or software application. (Driver  
and software settings override control panel  
settings.)  
Lighten or darken the print on the page by  
changingthetonerdensitysetting.Thesettings  
range from 1 (light) to 5 (dark), but the default  
setting of 3 usually produces the best results.  
TONER DENSITY=3  
1
2
3
4
5
Use a lower toner density setting to save toner.  
Note  
It is best to change the toner density from the  
printer driver or software application. (Driver  
and software settings override control panel  
settings.)  
Turn the automatic cleaning page feature on or  
off (for cleaning the fuser).  
AUTO  
ON  
OFF  
CLEANING PAGE=OFF  
The default frequency is every 2,000 pages.  
The options are 1,000, 2,000, 5,000, 10,000,  
and 20,000 pages.  
For more information, see “Running the  
cleaning page automatically” on page 92.  
No value to  
select.  
PressSELECT tomanuallyprintacleaningpage  
(for cleaning toner from the fuser). Follow the  
instructions on the cleaning page.  
CREATE CLEANING  
PAGE  
For more information, see “Running the  
cleaning page manually” on page 91.  
No value to  
select.  
This item appears only after a cleaning page  
has been generated (as described above).  
PROCESS CLEANING  
PAGE  
Press SELECT to process the cleaning page.  
218 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuration Menu  
Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer  
according to your printing needs.  
Configuration Menu  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Set how long the printer remains idle before it  
enters PowerSave mode.  
POWERSAVE TIME=  
30 MINUTES  
1 MINUTE  
15 MINUTES  
30 MINUTES  
1 HOUR  
PowerSave mode does the following:  
• minimizes the amount of power consumed  
by the printer when it is idle  
2 HOURS  
4 HOURS  
• reduces wear on the printer’s electronic  
components (turns off the display’s  
backlight)  
When you send a print job, press a control  
panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top  
cover, the printer automatically comes out of  
PowerSave mode.  
For further information about PowerSave  
mode, see POWERSAVEin the “Resets Menu”  
on page 223.)  
Determine how the printer behaves when toner  
is low. The message first appears when about  
15% of the toner remains in the cartridge  
(about 1,500 pages remaining for the 10,000-  
pagecartridgeandabout900pagesremaining  
for the 6,000-page cartridge at 5% page  
coverage).  
TONER LOW=  
CONTINUE  
CONTINUE  
STOP  
CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print  
while the message displayed.  
STOP: The printer will stop and wait for further  
action.  
For more information, see “Toner low and toner  
out conditions” on page 87.  
Determine how the printer behaves when toner  
is out. The message first appears when the  
toner cartridge is out of toner.  
TONER OUT=  
STOP  
CONTINUE  
STOP  
CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print  
with the message displayed.  
STOP: The printer will stop printing and further  
action is required.  
For more information, see “Toner low and toner  
out conditions” on page 87.  
EN  
Configuration Menu 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuration Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Set the amount of time that a clearable warning  
is displayed on the printer control panel.  
CLEARABLE  
JOB  
ON  
WARNINGS=JOB  
JOB: Warning messages display on the control  
panel until the end of the job from which they  
were generated.  
ON: Warning messages display on the control  
panel until GO is pressed.  
Determine how the printer reacts to errors.  
AUTO CONTINUE=  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the  
message will display, and the printer will go  
offline for 10 seconds before returning online.  
OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing,  
the message will remain on the display and the  
printer will remain offline until GO is pressed.  
If the printer is on a network, you will probably  
want to turn AUTO CONTINUEto ON.  
Determine how the printer behaves when a  
paper jam occurs.  
JAM RECOVERY=  
AUTO  
AUTO  
ON  
AUTO: The printer automatically selects the  
bestmodeforprinterjamrecovery(usuallyON).  
This is the default setting.  
OFF  
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages  
after a paper jam is cleared.  
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages  
following a paper jam. Printing performance  
might be increased with this setting.  
This item appears only after the PERFORM  
PRINTER MAINTENANCEmessage displays.  
MAINTENANCE  
MESSAGE=OFF  
OFF  
OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE  
message will be cleared but will return after 5%  
of the printer maintenance interval if the printer  
has been used without a new printer  
maintenance kit being installed.  
The message should be turned off only while  
waiting for the printer maintenance kit to be  
installed. If the required maintenance is not  
performed, the printer’s performance will  
degrade.  
For more information, see “Performing  
preventative maintenance” on page 93. To  
order the Printer Maintenance Kit, see  
“Ordering information” page 22.  
220 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuration Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Select ONto print the PS error page when PS  
errors occur.  
PRINT PS ERRORS=  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
Determine how the RAM disk is configured.  
This item appears only if there is no optional  
hard disk accessory installed and the printer  
has at least 16 MB of memory.  
RAM DISK=AUTO  
OFF  
ON  
AUTO  
OFF: The RAM disk is disabled.  
ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the  
amount of memory to be used through the  
following item: RAM DISK SIZE.  
Note  
If the setting is changed from OFFto ONor from  
OFFto AUTO, the printer will automatically  
reinitialize when it becomes idle.  
1to 50  
Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that  
can be stored on the printer’s hard disk  
accessory.  
QUICK COPY  
JOBS=32  
Sets the amount of time that held jobs are kept  
before being automatically deleted from the  
queue.  
HELD JOB  
OFF  
TIMEOUT=OFF  
1 HOUR  
4 HOURS  
1 DAY  
1 WEEK  
Select the default printer language  
(personality). Possible values are determined  
by which valid languages are installed in the  
printer.  
PERSONALITY=  
AUTO  
AUTO  
PCL  
PS  
Normally you should not change the printer  
language (the default is AUTO). If you change it  
to a specific printer language, the printer will  
not automatically switch from one language to  
another unless specific software commands  
are sent to the printer.  
EN  
Configuration Menu 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
I/O Menu  
Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication  
between the printer and the computer.  
I/O Menu  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication  
on or off. The default is set for a bidirectional  
parallel port (IEEE-1284).  
PARALLEL ADV  
ON  
COMMUNICATN=ON  
OFF  
This setting allows the printer to send status  
readback messages to the computer. (Turning  
the parallel advanced functions on might slow  
language switching.)  
Select the speed at which data is transmitted  
to the printer.  
PARALLEL HIGH  
SPEED=YES  
YES  
NO  
YES: The printer accepts faster parallel  
communications used for connections with  
newer computers.  
NO: The printer accepts slower parallel  
communications used for connections with  
older computers.  
5 to 300  
Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (I/O  
timeout refers to the time, measured in  
seconds, that the printer waits before ending a  
print job.)  
I/O TIMEOUT=  
15 SECONDS  
This setting allows you to adjust timeout for  
best performance. If data from other ports  
appear in the middle of your print job, increase  
the timeout value.  
Press -VALUE+ once to change settings by  
increments of 1, or hold down -VALUE+ to scroll  
by increments of 10.  
222 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Resets Menu  
Use the reset and restore options on this menu with caution. You can  
lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when you  
select these items. Only reset the printer under the following  
circumstances:  
G
G
you want to restore the printer’s default settings  
communication between the printer and computer has been  
interrupted  
G
you are using both the serial and parallel I/O ports, and one of the  
ports is having problems  
The reset and restore items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory  
in the printer, while CANCEL JOB clears only the current job.  
Note  
Job retention features will be deleted if you do not have the hard disk  
accessory.  
Resets Menu  
Item  
Value  
Explanation  
Change the value to YESonly if you are using  
a non-HP toner cartridge. YESlets the printer  
know that a new non-HP toner cartridge has  
been installed and resets the toner gauge to  
full.  
NEW TONER  
NO  
YES  
CARTRIDGE=NO  
No value to  
select.  
Thisitemclearstheprinterbufferandtheactive  
I/O input buffer, and resets the control panel to  
the current settings.  
RESET MEMORY  
Resetting memory during a print job can result  
in data loss.  
No value to  
select.  
This item performs a simple reset and restores  
most of the factory (default) settings. This item  
also clears the input buffer for the active I/O.  
RESTORE FACTORY  
SETTINGS  
Resetting memory during a print job can result  
in data loss.  
Restoring factory settings does not affect  
network parameter settings on the HP  
JetDirect print server.  
EN  
Resets Menu 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Resets Menu  
Item  
Value  
Explanation  
This item turns PowerSave mode on or off.  
PowerSave mode does the following:  
POWERSAVE=  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
• minimizes the amount of power consumed  
by the printer when it is idle  
• reduces wear on the printer’s electronic  
components (turns off the display’s  
backlight)  
When you send a print job, press a control  
panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top  
cover, the printer automatically comes out of  
PowerSave mode.  
You can set how long the printer remains idle  
before it enters PowerSave mode (see the  
POWERSAVE TIMEin the “Configuration Menu”  
on page 219).  
Note  
PowerSave turns off the backlight on the  
display, but the display is still readable.  
224 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EIO Menu  
The EIO (enhanced input/output) Menu appears only when an EIO  
device is installed in an EIO slot on the printer (such as an HP  
JetDirect print server). The items in the menu depend on the  
particular accessory product installed. If the printer contains an HP  
JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure basic networking  
parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other parameters can  
also be configured through HP Web JetAdmin.  
EIO Menu  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Select whether or not you want to access the  
HP JetDirect menu.  
CFG NETWORK=NO  
NO  
YES  
NO: Bypass the HP JetDirect menu.  
YES: Access the HP JetDirect Menu. You must  
change this to YESeach time you want to  
access the menu.  
Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack (in  
Novell NetWare networks, for example) is  
enabled (on) or disabled (off).  
IPX/SPX=ON  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is  
enabled (on) or disabled (off).  
DLC/LLC=ON  
TCP/IP=ON  
ATALK=ON  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is  
enabled (on) or disabled (off).  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol  
stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).  
ON  
OFF  
EN  
EIO Menu 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
EIO Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Select whether you want to access the IPX/  
SPX menu and set IPX/SPX protocol  
parameters.  
CFG IPX/SPX=NO  
NO  
YES  
NO: Bypass the IPX/SPX menu items.  
YES: Access the IPX/SPX menu items.  
In the IPX/SPX menu, you can specify the  
frame type parameter used on your network.  
The default is AUTO, to automatically set and  
limit the frame type to the first one detected.  
For Ethernet cards, frame type selections  
include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP.  
For Token Ring cards, frame type selections  
include TR_8022, TR_SNAP.  
In the IPX/SPX menu for Token Ring cards, you  
can also specify NetWare Source Routing  
parameters, which include SRC RT=AUTO  
(default), OFF, SINGLE R, or ALL RT.  
Select whether you want to access the TCP/IP  
menu and set TCP/IP protocol parameters.  
CFG TCP/IP=NO  
NO  
YES  
NO:Bypass the TCP/IP menu items.  
YES: Access the TCP/IP menu items  
In the TCP/IP Menu, you can specify  
BOOTP=YESor DHCP=YESfor TCP/IP  
parameters to be automatically loaded from a  
bootP or DHCP server when the printer is  
turned on.  
If you specify BOOTP=NO and DHCP=NO, you  
can manually set the following TCP/IP  
parameters from the control panel: each byte  
of the IP address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM),  
Syslog Server (LG), and Default Gateway  
(GW). You can also manually set the Idle  
Timeout time period.  
Print an HP JetDirect configuration page to  
verifyyoursettings. However, notethattheprint  
server might overwrite selected parameters  
with values that ensure proper operation.  
226 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
EIO Menu (continued)  
Item  
Values  
Explanation  
Select whether you want to manually configure  
the HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server’s  
network link speed and communication mode.  
The HP JetDirect settings must match the  
network.  
CFG LINK=NO  
NO  
YES  
NO: Bypass the link configuration menu items.  
YES:Accessthelinkconfigurationmenuitems.  
One of the following link configurations can be  
set:  
AUTO:The print server will automatically  
configure itself to match the network’s link  
speed and communication mode.  
10T HALF:10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
10T FULL: 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation.  
100T HALF:100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
100T FULL: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.  
EN  
EIO Menu 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
228 Appendix B - Control panel menus  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer memory and  
expansion  
C
Overview  
The printer has three dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slots  
for upgrading with:  
G
more printer memory—DIMMs are available in 4, 8, 16, 32,  
64, and 128 MB, for a maximum of 256 MB  
G
flash memory DIMMs—available in 2 and 4 MB; unlike  
standard printer memory, flash DIMMs can be used to  
permanently store downloaded items in the printer, even  
when the printer is off  
G
G
DIMM-based accessory fonts, macros, and patterns  
other DIMM-based printer languages and printer options  
Note  
Singlein-linememorymodules(SIMMs)usedonpreviousHP LaserJet  
printers are not compatible with the printer.  
You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often  
print complex graphics or PS documents, print with the optional  
duplexer, use many downloaded fonts, or print at ProRes 1200.  
Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job  
retention features, such as quick copying.  
The printer has two enhanced input/output (EIO) slots for  
expanding the printer’s capabilities with:  
G
G
G
a network card  
a connectivity card for serial, USB, or AppleTalk  
a mass storage device, such as a hard disk  
For ordering information, see “Ordering information” on page 22.  
To find out how much memory is installed in the printer, or to find  
out what is installed in the EIO slots, print a configuration page  
(see “Configuration page” on page 152).  
EN  
Overview 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Installing memory  
CAUTION  
Static electricity can damage dual in-  
line memory modules (DIMMs). When  
handling DIMMs, either wear an  
antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch  
the surface of the DIMM’s antistatic  
package, then touch bare metal on the  
printer.  
1
If you have not already done so, print a  
configuration page to find out how much  
memory is installed in the printer before  
adding more memory (see  
3
“Configuration page” on page 152).  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord and  
disconnect any cables.  
3 Grasp the cover (as illustrated) and  
pull it firmly toward the rear of the  
printer until it stops.  
4
4 Remove the cover from the printer.  
5 Open the DIMM access door by  
pulling on the metal tab.  
5
230 Appendix C - Printer memory and expansion  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6 Remove the DIMM from the  
antistatic package. Hold the DIMM  
with fingers against the side edges  
and thumbs against the back edge.  
Align the notches on the DIMM with  
the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks  
on each side of the DIMM slot are  
open, or outward.)  
6
7 Press the DIMM straight into the slot  
(press firmly). Make sure the locks  
on each side of the DIMM snap  
inward into place. (To remove a  
DIMM, the locks must be released.  
7
CAUTION  
Do not move or remove the DIMM in the  
lower slot.  
8
8 Close the DIMM access door. Make  
sure it locks into place.  
9 Set the bottom of the cover onto the  
printer. Make sure the bottom tabs  
on the cover fit into the  
corresponding slots in the printer.  
Rotate the cover up towards the  
printer.  
9
10 Slide the cover toward the front of  
the printer until it clicks into place.  
Reattach any cables and the power  
cord, then turn the printer on and  
test the DIMM (see “Checking  
memory installation” on page 232).  
10  
EN  
Installing memory 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking memory installation  
Follow this procedure to verify that DIMMs are installed correctly:  
1
Check that the printer control panel displays READYwhen the  
printer is turned on. If an error message appears, a DIMM might  
have been incorrectly installed. Check the printer messages (see  
“Understanding printer messages” on page 111).  
2
3
Print a new configuration page (see “Configuration page” on  
page 152).  
Check the memory section on the configuration page and  
compare it to the configuration page printed before the DIMM  
installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, the  
DIMM might not be installed correctly (repeat the installation  
procedure) or the DIMM might be defective (try a new DIMM).  
Note  
If you installed a printer language (personality), check the Installed  
Personalities and Options section on the configuration page. This area  
should list the new printer language.  
Saving resources (permanent resources)  
Utilities or jobs that you download to the printer sometimes include  
resources (for example, fonts, macros, or patterns). Resources that  
are internally marked as permanent remain in the printer's memory  
until you turn the printer's power off.  
Use the following guidelines if you make use of the PDL (page  
description language) ability to mark resources as permanent. For  
technical details, see an appropriate PDL reference for PCL or PS.  
G
Mark resources as permanent only when it is absolutely  
necessary that they remain in memory while the printer's power is  
turned on.  
G
Send permanent resources to the printer only at the beginning of  
a print job and not while the printer is printing.  
Note  
Overusing permanent resources or downloading them while the printer  
is printing might decrease the printer's performance or its ability to print  
complex pages.  
232 Appendix C - Printer memory and expansion  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Installing EIO cards/mass storage  
Follow this procedure to install an EIO card or mass storage device:  
Turn the printer off.  
Remove the two screws and cover plate from the EIO 1 or EIO 2  
1
2
slot on the back of the printer.  
3
Install the EIO card or mass storage device in the EIO slot and  
tighten the screws. See the figure below for orientation of the EIO  
card.  
4
Turn the printer on and print a configuration page to verify that the  
new EIO device is recognized (see “Configuration page” on  
page 152).  
Note  
For information on connecting an EIO card to a network and installing  
the network software, see “Printer software” on page 33 and also the  
getting started guide that came with the printer.  
Use HP Resource Manager to manage fonts on a mass storage  
device (see “HP Resource Manager” on page 37). For more  
information, see the printer driver online help.  
HP is constantly introducing new software tools for use with your  
printer and accessories. These tools are available from the Internet  
free of charge. See “Online services” on page 157 for how to visit the  
HP website for more information.  
EN  
Installing EIO cards/mass storage 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
234 Appendix C - Printer memory and expansion  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer commands  
D
Overview  
Most software applications do not require you to enter printer  
commands. See your computer and software documentation to find  
the method for entering printer commands, if needed.  
PCL 5e  
PCL 5e printer commands tell the printer which tasks to perform or  
which fonts to use. This appendix provides a quick reference for users  
who are already familiar with PCL 5e command structure.  
HP-GL/2  
The printer has the ability to print vector graphics using the HP-GL/2  
graphics language. Printing in the HP-GL/2 language requires that the  
printer leave PCL 5e language and enter HP-GL/2 mode, which can  
be done by sending the printer PCL 5e code. Some software  
applications switch languages through their drivers.  
PJL  
HP’s Printer Job Language (PJL) provides control above PCL 5e and  
other printer languages. The four major functions provided by PJL are:  
printer language switching, job separation, printer configuration, and  
status readback from the printer. PJL commands may be used to  
change printer default settings.  
Note  
The table at the end of this appendix contains commonly used PCL 5e  
commands (see “Common PCL 5e printer commands” on page 239).  
For a complete listing and explanation of how to use PCL 5e,  
HP-GL/2, and PJL commands, see the HP PCL/PJL Reference Set,  
available on CD (HP part number 5961-0975).  
EN  
Overview 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Understanding PCL 5e printer command syntax  
Before using printer commands, compare these characters:  
Lowercase l:  
Number one:  
l
1
Uppercase O:  
Number 0:  
O
0
Many printer commands use the lowercase letter l (l) and the  
number one (1), or the uppercase letter O (O) and the number zero  
(0). These characters may not appear on your screen as shown here.  
You must use the exact character and case specified for PCL 5e  
printer commands.  
The figure below displays the elements of a typical printer command  
(in this instance, a command for page orientation).  
Escape character  
Value field (contains both  
(begins escape sequence) alpha and numeric characters)  
Parameterized Group  
Termination character  
(uppercase)  
character  
character  
236 Appendix D - Printer commands  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Combining escape sequences  
Escape sequences may be combined into one escape sequence  
string. There are three important rules to follow when combining  
code:  
1
2
3
The first two characters after the ? character (the parameterized  
and group characters—see the figure on the previous page) must  
be the same in all of the commands to be combined.  
When combining escape sequences, change the uppercase  
(termination) character in each individual escape sequence to  
lower case.  
The final character of the combined escape sequence must be  
uppercase.  
The following is an example of an escape sequence string that would  
be sent to the printer to select legal paper, landscape orientation, and  
8 lines per inch:  
?&l3A?&l1O?&l8D  
The following escape sequence sends the same printer commands  
by combining them into a shorter sequence:  
?&l3a1o8D  
Entering escape characters  
Printer commands always begin with the escape character (?).  
The following table shows how the escape character can be entered  
from various MS-DOS® software applications.  
DOS software application Entry  
What appears  
Lotus 1-2-3 and Symphony  
Microsoft Word for DOS  
Type \027  
027  
Hold down Alt and type 027 on the  
numeric keypad  
←
WordPerfect for DOS  
MS-DOS Edit  
MS-DOS Edlin  
dBase  
Type <27>  
<27>  
Hold down Ctrl-P, and press Esc  
Hold down Ctrl-V, and press [  
?? CHR(27)+"command"  
←
^[  
?? CHR(27)+" "  
EN  
Understanding PCL 5e printer command syntax 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Selecting PCL 5e fonts  
The printer font list provides PCL 5e printer commands for selecting  
fonts (see “PCL or PS font list” on page 156 for information how to  
print the list). A sample section is shown below.  
There is one variable box for entering symbol sets and one for  
entering point size. These variables must be filled in or the printer will  
use defaults. For example, if you want a symbol set that contains line-  
draw characters, select the 10U (PC-8) or 12U (PC-850) symbol set.  
Other common symbol set codes are listed in the table on beginning  
on the next page.  
Font list  
1
2
1 Symbol set  
2 Point size  
Note  
Fontsareeither“fixed”or“proportional”inspacing. Theprintercontains  
both fixed fonts (Courier, Letter Gothic, and Lineprinter) and  
proportionalfonts(CGTimes,Arial ,TimesNewRoman ,andothers).  
Fixed-spaced fonts are generally used in applications such as  
spreadsheets and databases, where it is important for columns to line  
up vertically. Proportional-spaced fonts are generally used in text and  
word processing applications.  
238 Appendix D - Printer commands  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Common PCL 5e printer commands  
Common PCL 5e printer commands  
Function  
Command Options (#)  
Reset  
n/a  
?E  
Number of copies  
1 to 999  
?&l#X  
2-sided/1-sided printing  
0 = Simplex (1-sided) printing  
1 = Duplex (2-sided) with long edge binding  
2 = Duplex (2-sided) with short edge binding  
?&l#S  
?&l#H  
Paper source  
0 = prints or ejects current page  
1 = Tray 2  
2 = manual feed, paper  
3 = manual feed, envelope  
4 = Tray 1  
5 = Tray 3  
6 = Envelope Feeder  
7 = auto select  
8 = Tray 4  
20-69 = external trays  
Paper size  
1 = Executive  
2 = Letter  
?&l#A  
3 = Legal  
25 = A5  
26 = A4  
45 = B5-JIS  
80 = Monarch envelope  
81 = Commercial 10 envelope  
90 = DL ISO envelope  
91 = C5 ISO envelope  
100 = B5 ISO envelope  
101 = Custom  
Paper type  
5WdBond = Bond  
6WdPlain = Plain  
?&n#  
6WdColor = Color  
7WdLabels = Labels  
9WdRecycled = Recycled  
11WdLetterhead = Letterhead  
10WdCardstock = Cardstock  
11WdPrepunched = Prepunched  
11WdPreprinted = Preprinted  
13WdTransparency = Transparency  
#WdCustompapertype = Custom1  
Orientation  
0 = Portrait  
1 = Landscape  
?&l#O  
2 = Reverse Portrait  
3 = Reverse Landscape  
EN  
Understanding PCL 5e printer command syntax 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Common PCL 5e printer commands (continued)  
Function  
Command Options (#)  
Top Margin  
# = number of lines  
?&l#E  
Text Length (bottom margin)  
Left Margin  
# = number of lines from top margin  
?&l#F  
?&a#L  
?&a#M  
?&k#H  
?&l#C  
?&l#D  
?&l#L  
# = column number  
Right Margin  
# = column number from left margin  
Horizontal Motion Index  
Vertical Motion Index  
Line Spacing  
1/120-inch increments (compresses print horizontally)  
1/48-inch increments (compresses print vertically)  
# = lines per inch (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 16, 24, 48)  
Perforation Skip  
0 = disable  
1 = enable  
Vertical Position (Rows)  
Vertical Position (Dots)  
# = row number  
?&a#R  
?*p#Y  
?&a#V  
?&a#C  
?*p#X  
?&a#H  
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)  
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)  
# = column number  
Vertical Position (Decipoints)  
Horizontal Position (Columns)  
Horizontal Position (Dots)  
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)  
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)  
Horizontal Position  
(Decipoints)  
End of Line Wrap  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
?&s#C  
Display Functions On  
Display Functions Off  
n/a  
n/a  
?Y  
?Z  
Enter PCL 5e Mode  
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode  
0 = Use previous PCL 5e cursor position  
1 = Use current HP-GL/2 pen position  
?%#A  
?%#B  
0 = Use previous HP-GL/2 pen position  
1 = Use current PCL 5e cursor position  
240 Appendix D - Printer commands  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Common PCL 5e printer commands (continued)  
Function  
Command Options (#)  
Symbol Sets  
8U = HP Roman-8 Symbol Set  
?(#  
10U = IBM Layout (PC-8) (code page 437) Default Symbol Set  
12U = IBM Layout for Europe (PC-850) (code page 850)  
8M = Math-8  
19U = Windows 3.1 Latin 1  
9E = Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (commonly used in Eastern Europe)  
5T = Windows 3.1 Latin 5 (commonly used in Turkey)  
579L = Wingdings Font  
Primary Spacing  
0 = fixed  
1 = proportional  
?(s#P  
Primary Pitch  
# = characters/inch  
?(s#H  
?&k#S  
Set Pitch Mode2  
0 = 10  
4 = 12 (elite)  
2 = 16.5 - 16.7 (compressed)  
Primary Height  
Primary Style  
# = points  
?(s#V  
?(s#S  
0 = upright (solid)  
1 = italic  
4 = condensed  
5 = condensed italic  
Primary Stroke Wt.  
Typeface  
0 = medium (book or text)  
1 = semi bold  
3 = bold  
?(s#B  
?(s#T  
4 = extra bold  
Print a PCL 5e font list to view the command for each internal  
font (page 190).  
1For custom paper, replace “Custompapertype” with the name of the paper, and replace the “#” with the number of  
characters in the name, plus 1.  
2The preferred method is to use the primary pitch command.  
EN  
Understanding PCL 5e printer command syntax 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
242 Appendix D - Printer commands  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Regulatory information  
E
FCC regulations  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this  
equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will  
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
G
G
G
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.  
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is located.  
G
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.  
Note  
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly  
approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this  
equipment.  
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B  
limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.  
EN  
FCC regulations 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Environmental product stewardship program  
Protecting the environment  
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products  
in an environmentally-sound manner. The HP LaserJet printer has  
been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on the  
environment.  
This HP LaserJet printer eliminates:  
G
Ozone production  
The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic  
process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).  
This HP LaserJet printer design reduces:  
G
Energy consumption  
Energy usage drops significantly while in low-power (PowerSave)  
mode. Not only does this save natural resources, but it also saves  
money without affecting the high performance of this printer. This  
product qualifies for ENERGY STAR. ENERGY STAR is a voluntary  
program established to encourage the development of energy-  
efficient office products.  
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered service  
mark of the U.S. EPA. As an ENERGY STAR  
partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has  
determined that this product meets  
ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy  
efficiency.  
G
G
Toner consumption  
EconoMode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the  
life of the toner cartridge.  
Paper use  
Depending on the type of software program in use, you can  
request that a number of pages of your document be printed on  
one sheet of paper. This N-up printing practice and the printer’s  
automatic duplexing feature, which provides two-sided printing,  
can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural  
resources.  
244 Appendix E - Regulatory information  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
This HP LaserJet printer also contributes to protecting the  
environment in the following ways:  
G
Plastics marking for recycling  
Plastic parts over 25 grams have markings according to  
international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics  
for recycling purposes at the end of the printer’s life.  
G
HP Planet Partners toner cartridge recycling program  
In over 25 countries, this product’s  
toner cartridges can be returned to  
HP through the HP Planet Partners  
toner cartridge recycling program.  
Multi-lingual program information  
and instructions are included in  
every new HP LaserJet toner cartridge and consumables  
package.  
Since 1990, the HP Planet Partners toner cartridge recycling  
program has collected more than 39 million used LaserJet toner  
cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the  
world’s landfills. The HP LaserJet toner cartridges go to a  
collection center and are bulk-shipped to our recycling partners,  
who disassemble the cartridge parts for recycling. Materials are  
separated and converted into raw materials for use by other  
industries to make a variety of useful products.  
For more information about the Planet Partners recycling  
program, see http://www.ljsupplies.com/planetpartners.  
G
U.S. recycling returns  
For U.S. returns, HP Planet partners is an easy-to-use, free-of-  
charge way to recycle HP LaserJet toner cartridges. If you use  
only a few cartridges per year, all you have to do is use the pre-  
paid delivery label and instructions you will find in every HP  
LaserJet toner cartridge box. For returning multiple cartridges,  
HP encourages bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more  
cartridges together and apply the single, pre-paid, and pre-  
addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package.  
For returning large numbers of cartridges at one time, for  
additional mailing labels, or for more information call  
1-800-340-2445 in the U.S. or visit the HP LaserJet supplies  
website at http://www.ljsupplies.com/planetpartners.  
EN  
Environmental product stewardship program 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
G
Non-U.S. recycling returns  
For non-U.S. returns, check the toner cartridge recycling  
information in the box for instructions on recycling in your country.  
If your country is not listed or for further information on the Planet  
Partners program, contact your local HP Sales and Service  
Office.  
G
Recycled paper  
This printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the  
paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer  
Family Paper Specification Guide. See “Ordering information” on  
page 22 to order the guide. This printer is suitable for the use of  
recycled paper according to DIN 19309.  
To ensure longevity of your HP LaserJet printer, HP provides the  
following:  
G
Extended warranty  
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product  
and all HP-supplied internal components. The hardware  
maintenance covers a three-year period from date of the HP  
product purchase. The customer must purchase HP SupportPack  
within 90 days of the HP product purchase. Information on  
HP SupportPack is available (see “HP Customer Care Service  
and Support” on page 157).  
G
Spare parts and consumables availability  
Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be  
made available for at least 5 years after production has stopped.  
Material safety data sheets  
The Toner Cartridge/Drum material safety data sheet (MSDS) can be  
obtained by accessing http://www.hp.com/go/msds and selecting the  
HP LaserJet icon.  
If you do not have access to the Internet, call U.S. HP FIRST (fax-on-  
demand service) for material safety data sheets:  
G
G
within the U.S. and Canada, call (800) 231-9300  
outside the U.S. and Canada, call (404) 329-2009  
Select an Index to view a list of the available documents. Index 7  
contains the material safety data sheets for printer products.  
246 Appendix E - Regulatory information  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014  
Manufacturer’s Name:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
Manufacturer’s Address:  
11311 Chinden Boulevard  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
declares that the product  
Product Name:  
HP LaserJet 4100 / 4100N / 4100TN / 4100DTN / 4100SE  
C8049A / C8050A / C8051A / C8052A / C8048A  
ALL  
Model Numbers:  
Product Options:  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
Safety:  
EMC:  
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11  
IEC 825-1:1993 +A1 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A11 Class 1 Laser/LED Product  
1
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 Class B  
EN 61000-3-2:1995  
EN 61000-3-3:1995  
EN 55024: 1998  
2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-002, Issue 2  
AS / NZS 3548:1995  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low  
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly:  
1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.  
2. This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
3. Product exhibits Class A operation when connected to Local Area Network (LAN) cables using print  
server accessories.  
Boise, Idaho, USA  
February 2001  
For regulatory topics ONLY, contact:  
Australia Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41  
Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia  
European Contact:  
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-  
Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe,  
Herrenberger Straße110-140, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-  
14-3143)  
USA Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box  
15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)  
EN  
Environmental product stewardship program 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety statements  
Laser safety statement  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.  
Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser  
products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is  
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is  
certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of  
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance  
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act  
of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely  
confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser  
beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.  
WARNING!  
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other  
than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to  
hazardous radiation.  
Canadian DOC regulations  
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.  
«Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité  
électromagnétiques. «CEM».»  
EMI statement (Korea)  
VCCI statement (Japan)  
248 Appendix E - Regulatory information  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Laser statement for Finland  
Luokan 1 laserlaite  
Klass 1 Laser Apparat  
HP LaserJet 4100, 4100N, 4100TN, 4100DTN laserkirjoitin on  
käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa  
käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen  
ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN  
60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.  
Varoitus!  
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla  
saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle  
näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.  
Varning!  
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning  
specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som  
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.  
HUOLTO  
HP LaserJet 4100, 4100N, 4100TN, 4100DTN -kirjoittimen sisällä ei  
ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja  
huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi  
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista,  
paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja,  
käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan  
suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.  
Varo!  
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle  
lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.  
EN  
Safety statements 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Varning!  
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion,  
utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.  
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:  
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm  
Teho 5 mW  
Luokan 3B laser  
250 Appendix E - Regulatory information  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Embedded web  
server  
F
Overview  
This printer comes equipped with an embedded web server.  
Accessing the embedded web server from your PC’s standard  
web browser lets you obtain information about the printer,  
including:  
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
control panel messages  
consumable levels  
tray configuration  
printer control panel menu configuration  
printer configuration page  
printer event log  
printer usage (types of print jobs)  
network information  
You can also use the embedded web server to perform the print  
job management functions that would usually be done at the  
printer control panel. These functions include:  
G
G
G
changing printer settings  
changing printer configuration  
canceling print jobs  
EN  
Overview 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Accessing the embedded web server  
Note  
To use the embedded web server, you must have an IP-based network  
and web browser.  
Type the IP address assigned to the printer into your web browser to  
access the embedded web server. For example, if the printer’s IP  
address is 123.456.789.123, you would enter  
http://123.456.789.123 into your web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address for the printer, it is listed on the  
printer configuration page. For more information about printing a  
configuration page, see “Configuration page” on page 152.  
Embedded web server pages  
The embedded web server has three different sections for providing  
detailed information about the printer:  
G
G
G
Home pages  
Device pages  
Networking pages  
The various sections for the embedded web server are located on the  
right side of your web browser screen. Click the section that you want  
to view. Under the different section is a list of additional websites that  
you might use frequently.  
Note  
Each page in the embedded web server has access to Internet Help.  
For information regarding a particular page, click the Help icon.  
252 Appendix F - Embedded web server  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Home pages  
The home pages of the embedded web server are the informational  
pages for the printer. These include:  
G
Printer status page  
This page shows the printer control panel and the message that  
is currently displayed. The different control panel status lights and  
buttons are also displayed, so you can change the printer control  
panel menu settings from this page. Consumable life levels and  
the input tray media configuration are also displayed.  
G
G
Configuration page  
The printer configuration page is displayed from this site in the  
embedded web server. For more information, see “Configuration  
page” on page 152.  
Event log page  
This page shows the printer event log. For more information, see  
“Event Log” on page 153.  
G
G
Supplies page  
This page shows the levels of the consumables for the printer.  
Usage page  
This page shows how much of each media type has been used  
by the printer.  
G
Device identification page  
This page lets you name the device for network management  
needs, and shows the IP address and server for the printer.  
Device pages  
The device pages of the embedded web server allow you to configure  
the printer from your PC. These pages can be password protected.  
Always consult with your network administrator before changing the  
printer’s configuration.  
G
Configure printer page  
This page lets you configure all of the printer’s settings.  
G
Alerts page  
This page lets you configure who will be notified electronically for  
a variety of different printer events.  
G
E-Mail page  
The e-mail addresses of the people who will receive electronic  
notification of printer events are entered in this page.  
EN  
Embedded web server pages 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
G
G
G
G
Order supplies page  
The remaining life of the different consumables is shown on this  
page, and the links to the HP website for ordering supplies is also  
displayed.  
Contact information page  
The name and e-mail address of the primary point of contact for  
information about the printer is entered into this page. The  
primary point of contact is usually the network administrator.  
Security page  
This page configures the password information for the embedded  
web server. Password information should only be configured by  
the network administrator.  
Other links page  
This page is used to enter other websites into the embedded web  
server. These sites are displayed on the navigational bar  
throughout the embedded web server pages.  
G
G
G
Refresh rate page  
This page configures how often the embedded web server  
obtains information from the printer regarding the printer’s status.  
Language page  
The language that the embedded web server is displayed in is  
configured from this page.  
Device identification page  
This page lets you name the device for network management  
needs, and shows the IP address and server for the printer.  
Network pages  
This section of the embedded web server allows the network  
administrator to configure the HP JetDirect card for the printer.  
254 Appendix F - Embedded web server  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Index  
adhesive  
on envelopes 197  
on labels 196  
adjusting trays 2, 3, 4 47  
administrator software on printer CD 33  
Adobe Acrobat  
Symbols  
?
in control panel messages 31  
on control panel 29  
Numerics  
Reader 10  
100-sheet paper tray. See tray 1  
10Base-T cards, ordering 22  
10Base-TX cards, ordering 22  
1200 dpi, setting resolution to 217  
2-sided printing. See duplexing  
2-up printing 67  
300 dpi, setting resolution to 217  
3-hole punched paper 51  
500-sheet paper tray  
bad connection message 112  
capacity 190  
illustration 21  
location 19  
ordering 22  
using documents 9  
website 12  
agreements for service 160  
alerts page (embedded web server) 253  
alerts, configuring 94  
append CR to LF setting 216  
Apple EtherTalk setting 225  
Apple LaserWriter printer driver 40  
Apple Mac OS printer driver 34  
assigning a zone on the network 40  
Attention light 29  
authorized resellers 160  
Auto Cleaning Page setting 218  
auto continue setting 111, 220  
AutoCAD printer drivers 34  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
orienting special paper 54  
supported paper sizes and weights 190  
600 dpi, setting resolution to 217  
B
Background Printing (Macintosh) 144  
backlight, turning off 219  
bad duplexer connection message 112  
benefits of printer 16  
bidirectional parallel communication  
setting 222  
binding edge, setting 211  
binding options for duplexing 52  
bins. See output bins; rear output bin; top  
output bin  
black with white spots problem 136  
blank display 137  
A
A4 paper  
overriding with letter-size paper 216  
setting number of characters on single  
line 216  
access denied menus locked message  
32, 112  
accessing toner cartridge 20  
accessories  
direct ordering 160  
list and illustration 21  
ordering 22  
booklets 66  
both sides, printing. See duplexing  
browsing with thumbnails in online user  
guide 11  
verifying installation 152  
accessory guides 14  
acoustic emissions 202  
Acrobat  
bundles for printer 18  
Reader 10  
using documents 9  
website 12  
C
cables  
ordering 22  
adding  
troubleshooting serial 139  
Canada DOC regulations 248  
Cancel Job key 30  
memory 229  
printer drivers 33  
additional drivers, obtaining 33  
EN  
Index 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
canceling print jobs  
from control panel 30  
with embedded web server 251  
capacity  
500-sheet paper tray 190  
circuit 201  
clearing  
paper jam message from control panel  
96  
persistent messages 111  
clearing paper jams  
from duplexer 104  
duplexer 191  
envelope feeder 191  
tray 1 189  
trays 2, 3, 4 190  
card stock 198  
carriage return/line feed setting 216  
cartridges. See toner cartridges  
cassette mode  
from envelope feeder 100  
from fuser area 107  
from input tray areas 102  
from output areas 106  
from repeated jamming 110  
from top cover and toner cartridge areas  
98  
locating source 97  
description 69  
setting for tray 1 210  
CD  
for HP Support Assistant 160  
for service parts information 160  
CD for software and documentation  
ordering 22  
software included 33  
CFC usage 244  
clothing, cleaning toner from 89  
collating (mopying)  
error messages 126  
using 65  
combining escape sequences 237  
commands for printer  
cursor positioning 240  
description 235  
font selection 241  
CFG settings  
HP-GL/2 235  
IPX/SPX 226  
job control 239  
Network 225  
TCP/IP 226  
language selection 240  
page control 239  
changing  
PCL 235, 239  
control panel messages 40  
printer driver settings 36  
printer language 221  
printer resolution 217  
printer settings 40  
printer settings with embedded web  
server 251  
PJL 235  
programming hints 240  
selecting PCL fonts 238  
syntax 236  
compact disc  
for HP Support Assistant 160  
for service parts information 160  
compact disc for software and  
documentation  
characters  
escape 237  
garbled on screen 137  
misformed 134  
checking  
ordering 33  
software included 33  
compatibility  
toner cartridge life expectancy 85  
toner level 85  
between printer products 203  
SIMM 229  
chlorofluorocarbons 244  
Chooser, troubleshooting 143  
choosing right printer driver 37  
circuit capacity 201  
cleaning  
configuration  
bundles available for printer 18  
current printer 205  
obtaining information with embedded web  
browser 251  
fuser automatically 92  
fuser manually 91  
paper path 91  
Configuration Menu 111, 219  
configuration page  
blank page prints 138  
cannot print 138  
printer 88  
toner from clothing 89  
cleaning page 91  
setting to run automatically 218  
setting to run manually 218  
clearable warnings setting 111, 220  
description 153  
location in control panel menus 208  
printing 152  
printing with embedded web server 251  
configuration page (embedded web server)  
256 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
253  
access denied 32  
configure printer page (embedded web  
server) 253  
accessing 32  
Configuration 219  
configuring  
alerts 94  
cycling through at control panel 30  
EIO 225  
control panel messages 40  
custom paper 213  
exiting 30  
I/O 222  
embedded web server language 254  
fuser mode 212  
Information 208  
Paper Handling 210  
HP JetDirect card with embedded web  
server 254  
Print Quality 217  
Printing 213  
network parameters 225  
Novell NetWare parameters 41  
number of quick copy jobs 221  
printer 13  
Private/Stored Jobs Menu 207  
Quick Copy Jobs Menu 206  
Resets 223  
converting paper weights 194  
copies  
printer drivers 36  
printer for IP printing 40  
printer password 40  
printer personality (language) 221  
printer reaction to errors 220  
printers connected to network with HP  
JetDirect print server 41  
RAM disk settings 221  
response to toner low 87  
response to toner out 87  
toner low and toner out settings 219  
consumables. See supplies  
consumption  
printing additional 72  
quick jobs 72  
setting default number 213  
setting number of private/stored jobs 207  
setting number of quick 206  
country/region offices worldwide for  
customer sales and service 172  
country/region sales and service offices  
172  
Courier font, setting 216  
CR/LF (carriage return/line feed) setting  
216  
power 201  
saving energy 244  
saving paper 244  
saving toner 244  
creased paper problem 135  
Create Cleaning Page setting 218  
crooked page problem 134  
curled  
contact information page (embedded web  
server) 254  
envelopes 197  
paper 192, 198  
control panel  
? label 29  
? message 31  
changing settings 32  
configuring messages 40  
description 205  
description and illustration 29  
does not display READY message 137  
keys 30  
curled paper problem 135  
current printer settings, checking 32, 151  
cursor positioning commands for printer  
240  
custom paper  
setting dimensions for short and long  
edges 214  
setting option 213  
setting units of measure 214  
customer service  
lights 29, 219  
location 19  
locking functions 40  
menu map 32  
worldwide country/region offices 172  
customer support  
country/region sales and service offices  
worldwide 172  
messages 111  
overriding settings 32  
printing menu map 32  
saving settings 30  
settings overridden by printer driver and  
software commands 205  
troubleshooting 137  
wrong language 137  
control panel menus  
direct ordering for accessories and  
supplies 160  
during and after warranty period 165  
fraud hotline 161  
HP Support Packs 161  
language and in-country options 163  
online product information 160  
online services 157  
EN  
Index 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
parts information 160  
service agreements 160  
worldwide support options 162  
Customization Utility 36  
customizing  
description 229  
expanding 229  
handling static electricity 230  
illustration 21  
installing 229  
See also configuring  
tray 1 operating 69  
trays used for printing 68  
custom-size paper  
ordering 22  
printing font list 156  
directory of files, printing 208  
disk  
guidelines for printing 63  
margins 63  
printing 63  
printing to rear output bin 45  
setting paper size 63  
failure 112  
failure (RAM) 116  
file system full 113  
file system full (RAM) 117  
operation failed 113  
supported sizes and weights in tray 1 189 operation failed (RAM) 117  
supported sizes and weights in trays 2, 3, write protected 113  
4 190  
display panel. See control panel  
distributing printer drivers 36  
DLC/LLC setting 225  
DOC (Declaration of Conformity)  
Canadian 248  
D
dark printing, setting toner density 218  
Data light 29  
data, transmitting speed 222  
dBase, entering escape characters in 237  
Declaration of Conformity (DOC)  
Canadian 248  
U.S. 247  
decreasing page view 10  
defaults  
changing printer driver 36  
image size for paper 213  
number of copies 213  
printer personality (language) 221  
restoring settings 223  
viewing settings 205  
U.S. 247  
documentation  
accessory guides 14  
additional information 13  
Getting Started Guide 13  
HP Fast Infrared Receiver User Guide 14  
HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s  
Guide 13  
online help 14  
ordering 22  
using online user guide 9  
DOS Edit, entering escape characters in  
237  
DOS Edlin, entering escape characters in  
237  
DOS, entering escape characters 237  
double-side-seam envelopes 197  
downloading  
flash memory across networks 37  
fonts 37  
macros 37  
draft quality printing  
setting 217  
through EconoMode 218  
DRAMM DIMMs, ordering 22  
drivers, printer. See printer drivers  
dropouts  
in printing 192  
on page 131  
defects repeating problem 133  
deleting  
private jobs 77  
private/stored jobs 207  
quick copy 73  
quick copy jobs 206  
stored print jobs 79  
Desktop Printer Utility 33  
device identification page (embedded web  
server) 253, 254  
device pages (embedded web server) 253  
dimensions  
printer 200  
setting for long edge of paper 214  
setting for short edge of custom paper  
214  
supported for duplexer 191  
supported for envelopes in envelope  
feeder 191  
supported for paper in tray 1 189  
supported for paper in trays 2, 3, 4 190  
DIMMs  
duplex printing accessory  
bad connection message 112  
capacity 191  
clearing jams 104  
illustration 21  
installing 49  
258 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ordering 22  
paper orientation 51  
supported paper sizes 49  
inserting and removing 58  
load problems 113  
loading 59  
supported paper sizes and weights 191 ordering 22  
troubleshooting 110  
using with rear output bin 50  
duplexer. See duplex printing accessory  
duplexing  
setting envelope size 210  
setting size from control panel 71  
setting type 210  
specifications 55  
binding options 52  
booklets 66  
supported paper sizes and weights 191  
using 57  
description 49  
envelopes  
guidelines 50  
adhesive strips or flaps 197  
location of option in control panel menus curled 197  
211  
double-side-seam 197  
dust cover  
guidelines 55  
location 20  
handling flaps 197  
tray 2 and duplexer 49  
loading in envelope feeder 59  
margins 55, 198  
printing 55  
E
printing from envelope feeder 57  
printing from tray 1 56  
printing to rear output bin 45  
setting size 210  
EconoMode setting 218  
edge of binding, setting 211  
Edlin, entering escape characters in 237  
EIO cards  
description 21  
installing 233  
ordering 22  
EIO Menu 225  
EIO slots  
description 229  
setting type 210  
solving repeated jams 110  
specifications 55, 57, 197  
storing 198  
supported by envelope feeder 191  
troubleshooting jams 197  
wrinkled 55  
environmental product stewardship 244  
environmental specifications 201  
equipment  
defects 167  
packing 165  
returning 165  
shipping 165  
learning what is installed 229  
location 20  
electrical specifications 201  
e-mail page (embedded web server) 253  
embedded web server  
configuring language displayed in 254  
configuring refresh rate 254  
description 251  
warranty 167, 246  
device pages 253  
equivalent weights to U.S. paper 194  
error log. See event log  
error messages. See messages  
error page for PS 221  
errors. See troubleshooting  
escape characters  
entering in DOS 237  
examples 236  
escape sequences  
combining 237  
selecting 156  
Etalk setting 225  
Ethernet cards, ordering 22  
EtherTalk setting 225  
event log 153  
location in control panel control menus  
208  
help 252  
home pages 253  
network pages 254  
using 252  
using to check toner level 85  
using to configure alerts 94  
using to order parts and accessories 22  
EMI statement for Korea 248  
emissions, acoustic 202  
energy consumption 201, 244  
Energy Star 244  
enlarging page view 10  
envelope feeder  
bad connection message 112  
capacity 191  
clearing paper jams 100  
envelope specifications 57  
illustration 21  
printing with embedded web server 251  
EN  
Index 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
viewing 208  
printing 156  
event log page (embedded web server)  
253  
font lists. See PCL font list; PS font list  
fonts  
exiting control panel menus 30  
expanding  
memory 229  
fixed-space 238  
information about 156  
internal 156  
printer capability 229  
extended warranty 246  
extension for tray 1 46  
not supported 33  
on printer CD 33  
ordering DIMMs 22  
PCL bitmap 37  
point sizes 238  
printer features 16  
printing list of 156  
F
face-down output bin 44  
face-up output bin 45  
Fast Infrared (FIR)  
proportional-spaced 238  
selecting PCL 238  
selection commands for printer 241  
setting Courier 216  
setting number for PCL 215  
setting PCL font point size 215  
setting pitch for PCL 215  
setting source 214  
soft 156  
symbol sets 238  
troubleshooting for Macintosh 144  
TrueType 37  
verifying installed for printer 153  
form length 214  
form, Service Information 166  
fraud hotline 161  
frequent paper jams, solving 110  
front panel. See control panel  
fuser  
cleaning 91  
clearing jams 107  
configuring mode 212  
error message 122  
location 20  
paper wrapped around 116  
removing 107  
description of receiver 80  
IRDA compliance 148  
ordering receiver 22  
printing with 80  
receiver port location 20  
troubleshooting receiver 148  
Fast Infrared Receiver User Guide 14  
FastRes 1200 217  
FastRes resolution 16  
FCC regulations 243  
features of printer 16  
feed rollers, replacing 93  
feeding paper  
manually from tray 1 71  
problems 192  
feeding paper manually 211  
file directory, printing 208  
finding words in online user guide 11  
Finland laser statement 249  
FIR (Fast Infrared). See Fast Infrared (FIR)  
first page, printing different 67  
Fit Page 10  
Fit Visible 10  
Fit Width 10  
fixed-spaced fonts 238  
flaps on envelopes 197  
flash DIMMs  
replacing 93  
setting for rough and heavy paper 212  
setting for transparencies 212  
speed 16  
description 229  
failure 114  
ordering 22  
G
write protected 114  
flash file  
genuine HP toner cartridges 84  
Getting Started Guide 13  
glossy paper, ordering 22  
Go key 30  
failed operation 114  
full 114  
flash memory  
downloading 37  
initializing 37  
go to pages in online user guide 11  
graphics  
Flip Pages Up binding option 52  
flowchart for troubleshooting printer  
problems 137  
memory for printing complex 229  
vector 235  
gray background  
font list  
problem 132  
description 156  
troubleshooting 192  
260 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
guidelines  
illustration 21  
card stock 63, 199  
custom-size paper 63  
duplexing 50  
envelopes 55, 197  
labels 61, 196  
installing 233  
ordering cards 22  
HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s  
Guide 13  
HP JetDirect print server card  
configuring network parameters 225  
configuring with embedded web server  
254  
paper 188, 192  
transparencies 62, 196  
HP JetSend  
description 38  
installing 38  
website 38  
HP LaserJet paper 22  
HP LaserJet Printing System 34  
HP LaserJet Utility  
description 40  
on printer CD 33  
H
hard disk accessory  
illustration 21  
installing 233  
ordering 22  
hardware  
defects 167  
packing 165  
returning 165  
shipping 165  
warranty 167, 246  
heavy paper  
fuser mode 212  
printing 45, 63  
specifications 198  
held job  
deleting 75  
HP Maintenance Agreement 165  
HP Planet Partners program  
description 245  
website 245  
HP Resource Manager  
availability for Macintosh 37  
description 37  
where to install 33  
HP Software License Terms 170  
HP Support Assistant 160  
HP SupportPacks 161, 246  
HP UltraPrecise toner 16  
HP Web JetAdmin 33  
installing 41  
using to check toner level 86  
using to configure alerts 94  
website 41  
printing 74  
held job timeout setting 221  
help  
? control panel label 29  
? message 31  
button in printer driver 37  
embedded web server 252  
exiting 31  
fraud hotline 161  
HP Support Assistant 160  
language and in-country options 163  
online services 157  
online user guide 14, 31  
printer driver 37  
product repair assistance 162  
screens 37  
HP-GL/2 commands 235  
HP-UX printer software 41  
humidity specifications 202  
I
I/O cards  
description 21  
worldwide country/region sales and  
service offices 172  
worldwide support options 162  
installing 233  
I/O communication settings 222  
I/O Menu 222  
high 1 and high 2 fuser mode settings 212 I/O slots  
holding a job 74  
description 229  
home pages (embedded web server) 253 learning what is installed 229  
host systems 41  
location 20  
HP authorized resellers 160  
I/O timeout setting 222  
HP Fast Infrared Receiver User Guide 14 IBM OS/2 printer driver 34  
HP fraud hotline 161  
inches, setting for custom paper sizes 214  
HP JetAdmin software  
incorrect fonts 144  
increasing page view 10  
index cards 198  
using to set type and size settings 71  
HP JetDirect print server  
communicating with 150  
Information Menu 208  
EN  
Index 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
infrared  
installing software 80  
printing with 80  
canceling 30  
canceling with embedded web server  
251  
input trays  
configuring timeout for held 221  
deleting held 75  
deleting private 77  
deleting stored 79  
formatted incorrectly 141  
infrared 81  
bad connection message 112  
cannot feed paper 112  
clearing paper jams 102  
empty condition message 117  
location 19  
locking 70  
managing 72  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
understanding order used 68  
input/output communication settings 222  
inserting envelope feeder 58  
installed personalities and options,  
not printing as expected 140  
printing and deleting stored 207  
printing private 76  
printing stored 78  
proofing and holding 74  
displayed on configuration page 153 quick copying 72  
installing  
releasing private 76  
EIO cards 233  
retaining 72  
envelope feeder 58  
HP JetSend 38  
setting number of private/stored 207  
setting number of quick 206  
specifying private 76  
stop in the middle of printing 140  
will not print 139  
HP Resource Manager 37  
HP Web JetAdmin 41  
infrared software 80  
mass storage devices 233  
memory (DIMMs) 230  
printer drivers 35  
printers connected to network with HP  
JetDirect print server 41  
software 33  
jumping to pages in online user guide 11  
K
keys on control panel 30  
kit for printer maintenance  
ordering 22  
using 93  
Korea EMI statement 248  
UNIX printer software 41  
interface ports 20  
internal fonts 156  
IP address, displaying with embedded web L  
server 253  
labels  
orienting sheets 61  
printing 61  
IP addresses, current 153  
IP printing, configuring 40  
IPX/SPX setting 225  
printing to rear output bin 45  
solving repeated jams 110  
specifications 196  
IRDA compliance for Fast Infrared (FIR)  
Receiver 148  
Item key 30  
landscape orientation, setting 214  
language page (embedded web server)  
254  
J
jam recovery setting 220  
jams, paper. See paper jams  
Japan VCCI statement 248  
JetAdmin. See HP Web JetAdmin  
JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide  
13  
JetDirect print server. See HP JetDirect  
print server  
JetSend. See HP JetSend  
job control commands for printer 239  
job management 72  
languages  
not available for printer 116  
options for customer service 163  
printer features 16  
printer selection commands 240  
selecting printer personality default 221  
setting for printer 221  
switching printer 37  
verifying installed for printer 153  
wrong on control panel 137  
wrong one displayed 137  
laser safety statements  
Finland 249  
job retention 72  
Job Storage Disk Error page 126  
jobs  
U.S. 248  
262 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LaserJet paper. See HP LaserJet paper  
LaserJet Utility. See HP LaserJet Utility  
LaserWriter printer driver 40  
latest printer drivers 33  
layout options  
duplexing 52  
renaming the printer 145  
selecting alternate PPD 145  
software 40  
software on printer CD 33  
troubleshooting flowchart 143  
magnifying page view 10  
printing multiple pages on one sheet 67 maintenance  
LEDs on control panel 29  
length of printing on page 214  
letterhead paper  
agreements 165  
ordering kit 22  
ordering parts 22  
printer 93  
duplexing 51  
printing 53  
repairs 162  
letter-size paper, printing instead of A4 216maintenance message setting 220  
license for software 170  
life expectancy for toner cartridges  
checking 85  
manual cleaning page  
running 91  
setting 218  
description 85  
light printing  
manual feed, setting 211  
manually cleaning fuser 91  
manually feeding paper 71  
manuals. See documentation  
map of control panel menus. See menu  
map  
output problem 130  
setting toner density 218  
lights  
on control panel 29  
turning off (PowerSave) 219  
line feed/carriage return setting 216  
line voltage 201  
margins  
custom-size paper 63  
envelopes 55, 198  
marks on page problem 136  
mass storage devices  
installing 233  
lines  
on page problem 131  
on paper problem 135  
setting number on page 214  
printing file directory 208  
linking to other websites from embedded material safety data sheet (MSDS) 246  
web server 254  
loading  
matrix of compatibility 203  
maximum  
envelope feeder 59  
envelopes in envelop feeder 57  
envelopes in tray 1 56  
tray 1 46  
paper size 189  
printer temperature 193  
measure, setting units of 214  
media. See card stock; custom-size paper;  
envelopes; HP LaserJet paper; index  
cards; labels; letterhead paper;  
paper; preprinted/prepunched paper;  
special paper; transparencies  
memory  
trays 2, 3, 4 47  
LocalTalk cards, ordering 22  
locating paper jams 97  
locked menus message 112  
locking  
functions on control panel 40  
trays 70  
loose toner  
changed settings message 115  
checking installation 232  
description 229  
problem 133  
DIMM illustration 21  
troubleshooting 192  
expansion 229  
Lotus 1-2-3, entering escape characters in for printing complex graphics 229  
237  
full message 115  
initializing 37  
installation location 19  
installing DIMMs 230  
installing EIO cards/mass storage 233  
insufficient 120  
learning how much is installed 229  
managing settings 232  
shortage messages 115  
M
Macintosh  
availability of HP Resource Manager 37  
HP LaserJet Utility 40  
PPDs 35, 40, 145  
printer drivers 37, 40  
printing with infrared 80  
EN  
Index 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
specifications 202  
upgrading 229  
Menu key 30  
configuring parameters 225  
HP Web JetAdmin 33  
software 33  
menu map  
software for 41  
location in control panel menus 208  
printing 32, 151  
menu tree. See menu map  
menus. See control panel menus  
messages  
troubleshooting Macintosh 143  
noise emissions 202  
notification of events, setting up 253  
Novell NetWare  
configuring parameters 41  
networks 36  
clearing persistent 111  
customizing 40  
setting 225  
list, explanation, and recommended  
action 112  
numbers for printer, serial and model 20  
n-up printing 67  
understanding 111  
Microsoft Windows  
configuring drivers 36  
network software 33  
printer drivers 35  
printer fonts 16  
printing with infrared 80  
software included on printer CD 33  
Microsoft Word for DOS, entering escape  
characters in 237  
millimeters, setting for custom paper size  
214  
minimum paper size 189  
misfeeding pages 141  
misformed characters problem 134  
model number for printer 20  
mopying (collating)  
O
offline, sending printer 30  
online help  
? message 31  
exiting 31  
printer 37  
user guide 31  
online operation, returning to 30  
online services  
description 157  
direct ordering 160  
HP Support Assistant 160  
parts information 160  
printer drivers, printer software, product  
and support information 157  
software utilities 158  
online user guide  
browsing with thumbnails 11  
finding information 10  
finding words 11  
error messages 126  
using 65  
moving around in online user guide 9  
MS-DOS. See DOS  
MSDS (material safety data sheet) 246  
multi-purpose paper, ordering 22  
multi-purpose tray. See tray 1  
magnifying page view 10  
navigating 9  
online help 14  
paging through 11  
printing 11  
using online 9  
N
naming  
devices with embedded web server 253 operating systems  
printer 40  
Red Hat Linux 41  
Sun Solaris 41  
supported 35  
narrow paper, printing 53  
navigating in online user guide 9  
NetWare  
SuSE Linux 41  
configuring parameters 41  
networks 36  
setting 225  
website for supported 41  
operating temperature 202  
order of trays used 68  
order supplies page (embedded web  
server) 254  
network  
assigning zone 40  
HP Web JetAdmin software for 41  
network administrator software on printer  
CD 33  
network pages (embedded web server)  
254  
ordering  
accessories and supplies 21  
supplies through embedded web server  
254  
orientation  
networks  
for duplexing 51  
264 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
orientation setting 214  
orienting  
label sheets 61  
special paper 54  
transparencies 62  
OS/2 printer drivers 35  
locating 97  
resolving repeated 110  
paper level indicator 19  
paper path  
cleaning 91  
test 209  
other links page (embedded web server) paper tray extension 46  
254  
paper trays  
output bins  
adjustments 47  
clearing paper jams 106  
location 20  
using 44  
overhead transparencies. See  
transparencies  
bad connection message 112  
cannot feed paper 112  
clearing jams 96, 102  
empty condition message 117  
loading 47  
override A4 with letter setting 216  
overriding printer settings 36  
ozone production 244  
loading tray 1 46  
location 19  
locking 70  
ordering 22  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
parallel communication setting 222  
parallel high speed setting 222  
parallel interface port 20  
partial page prints 130  
parts  
after production has stopped 246  
information on CD 160  
location on printer 19  
returning 165  
shipping and packing 165  
website for identification and pricing 160  
password  
embedded web server 254  
printer 40  
P
packing equipment 165  
Page 134  
page control commands 239  
page count for printer 153  
paging through online user guide 9, 11  
paper  
card stock 198  
custom-size 45  
guidelines for using 192  
heavy 198  
manually feeding 71  
ordering 22  
printing custom-size 63  
problem symptoms, causes, and  
solutions 192  
recycling 246  
saving 244  
settings for rough or heavy 212  
specifications 188  
supported weights and sizes 189  
types supported 192  
types to avoid 193  
PC-8 symbol set 215  
PC-850 symbol set 215  
PCL  
commands 235  
printing font list 156  
selecting fonts 238  
setting as printer language 221  
setting font number 215  
setting font pitch 215  
setting font point size 215  
setting source of fonts 214  
setting symbol set setting 215  
PCL 5e printer drivers  
included with printer 35  
when to use 37  
PCL 6 printer drivers  
included with printer 35  
when to use 37  
PCL bitmap fonts 37  
PCL command 239  
PCL font list  
weight equivalences 194  
paper handling  
available accessories 17  
features 16  
ordering accessories 22  
Paper Handling Menu 210  
paper jams  
clearing from duplexer 104  
clearing from envelope feeder 100  
clearing from fuser area 107  
clearing from output areas 106  
clearing input tray areas 102  
clearing top cover area 98  
configuring alerts 94  
configuring recovery behavior 220  
description 156  
location in control panel menu maps 208  
EN  
Index 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
printing 156  
PDF (portable document format)  
documents  
browsing with thumbnails 11  
finding information 10  
finding words 11  
PostScript Level 2 emulation 35  
PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs).  
See PPDs (PostScript Printer  
Description files)  
PostScript Type 1 37  
PostScript Type 42 37  
icons 9  
PostScript. See PS  
increasing and decreasing magnification power  
10  
connector location 20  
navigating 9  
printing 11  
using 9  
consumption 201  
requirements 201  
saving 219, 244  
standby 201  
viewing 10  
perform printer maintenance message 93 switch location 19  
permanent fonts 156  
PowerSave  
permanent resources for printer 232  
personal identification number (PIN) for  
printing private/stored jobs 207  
mode 244  
power consumption 201  
setting 219  
personality (language), setting for printer PPDs (PostScript Printer Description files)  
221  
Macintosh 40  
Personality setting 221  
PhoneNET interface, ordering 22  
physical dimensions for printer 200  
pickup rollers, replacing 93  
PIN (personal identification number) for  
printing private/stored jobs 207  
pitch/point information 156  
PJL (Printer Job Language) commands  
235  
on printer CD 33  
selecting alternate 145  
preprinted/prepunched paper  
duplexing 51  
printing 53  
preventative maintenance 93  
pricing for parts 160  
print cartridges. See toner cartridges  
print drivers. See printer drivers  
print jobs  
Planet Partners program  
description 245  
canceling 30  
website 245  
configuring timeout for held 221  
deleting held 75  
deleting private 77  
deleting stored 79  
plastics, recycling 245  
portable document format (PDF)  
documents  
browsing with thumbnails 11  
finding information 10  
finding words 11  
formatted incorrectly 141  
infrared 81  
managing 72  
icons 9  
not printing as expected 140  
increasing and decreasing magnification printing private 76  
10  
printing stored 78  
navigating 9  
printing 11  
proofing and holding 74  
quick copying 72  
using 9  
releasing private 76  
viewing 10  
retaining 72  
portrait orientation, setting 214  
ports  
accessory interface 20  
bidirectional parallel setting 222  
FIR (Fast Infrared) receiver 20  
locations 20  
parallel interface 20  
postcards  
paper weight equivalences 194  
printing 63  
setting number of quick 206  
specifying private 76  
stop in the middle of printing 140  
will not print 139  
Print Quality Menu 217  
print quality problems  
correcting 128  
symptoms, causes, and solutions 192  
print resolution 217  
print servers, communicating with HP  
JetDirect 150  
specifications 198  
266 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
print speed 202, 217  
printer  
configuring for duplexer 50  
description 35  
cleaning 88  
distributing 36  
compatibility matrix 203  
configurations 18  
help software 37  
included on printer CD 33  
configuring settings with embedded web included with printer 35  
server 253  
infrared 80  
control panel description and illustration  
29  
current settings 151  
dimensions 200  
Macintosh 40  
Microsoft Windows 36  
online help 14  
OS/2 35  
features and benefits 16  
help software 37  
PCL 5e 37  
PCL 6 37  
maintenance 93  
PS 37  
managing and troubleshooting remotely  
41  
settings versus software program 32  
troubleshooting Macintosh 143  
website 157  
Printer Job Language (PJL) commands  
235  
managing internal resources 232  
managing through network 41  
maximum temperature 193  
memory and expansion 229  
naming 40  
printer languages (personality), selecting  
default 221  
obtaining information with embedded web printer maintenance kit  
browser 251  
ordering 22  
online help 31  
using 93  
operating systems supported 35  
operating temperature 202  
ordering supplies 22  
overriding control panel settings 36  
parts and locations 19  
password 40  
printer software  
available on printer CD 33  
website 157  
printer status page (embedded web server)  
253  
printing  
placing printer online or offline 30  
pulling from wrong tray 142  
relative 202  
renaming for Macintosh 145  
resetting 223  
booklets 66  
by type and size of paper 70  
configuration page 152  
control panel menu map 32  
different first page 67  
envelopes 55  
saving settings 66  
setting up 13  
envelopes from tray 1 56, 197  
feeding paper manually 71  
file directory 208  
font list 156  
for IP 40  
setting up notification of events 253  
software included on CD 33  
space requirements 200  
specifications 200  
weight 201  
Printer Collation Error page 126  
printer commands  
heavy paper 63, 198  
held jobs 74  
labels 61  
cursor positioning 240  
description 235  
font selection 241  
language selection 240  
PCL 235, 239  
programming hints 240  
syntax 236  
menu map 32, 151  
multiple pages on one sheet 67  
online user guide 11  
paper path test 209  
quick copy jobs 206  
small or narrow paper 53  
speed 202, 217  
printer drivers  
stops in the middle 140  
stored jobs 78, 207  
supplies status page 154  
transparencies 62  
usage page 208  
Apple LaserWriter 40  
Apple LaserWriter 8 37  
choosing the right one 37  
configuring 36  
EN  
Index 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
watermarks 66  
Reader  
website 12  
Reader for Adobe Acrobat 10  
ReadMe.txt file 33  
ReadMe.wri file 33  
Ready light 29  
with infrared receiver 80  
Printing Menu 213  
private job  
deleting 77  
printing 76  
releasing 76  
rear output bin  
specifying 76  
clearing paper jams 106  
location 20  
using 45  
using with duplexer 50  
rearoutput bin  
Private/Stored Jobs Menu 207  
problems. See troubleshooting  
Process Cleaning Page setting 218  
product  
compatibility matrix 203  
repair 162  
return 166  
location 19  
recovery from jams, configuring behavior  
220  
stewardship program 244  
programming hint commands for printer  
240  
proof and hold feature 74  
proofing a job 74  
recycled paper, ordering 22  
recycling  
non-U.S. returns 246  
paper 246  
plastics 245  
proportional-spaced fonts 238  
ProRes resolution 16  
protecting the environment 244  
protocol settings 225  
PS  
error page prints 139  
printing font list 156  
setting as printer language 221  
setting error page printing 221  
PS font list  
toner cartridges 245  
U.S. returns 245  
Red Hat Linux 41  
redistributing toner in the cartridge 86  
refresh rate page (embedded web server)  
254  
regulations  
Canada DOC 248  
FCC 243  
U.S. DOC 247  
description 156  
location in control panel menus 208  
printing 156  
PS printer drivers  
included with printer 35  
when to use 37  
regulatory information 243  
relative humidity specifications 202  
remote printer management and  
troubleshooting 41  
removing  
envelope feeder 58  
fuser 107  
punched paper, printing 53  
held print jobs 75  
private jobs 77  
private/stored jobs 207  
quick copy 73  
quick copy jobs 206  
stored print jobs 79  
renaming the printer for Macintosh 145  
repacking equipment 165  
repairs 162  
repeated paper jams, solving 110  
repeating  
defects problem 133  
image problem 134  
paper jams 110  
report on supplies usage 154  
requirements  
environmental 201  
power 201  
Q
question mark (?)  
in control panel messages 31  
label on control panel 29  
quick copy  
additional copies 72  
configuring number of stored jobs 221  
deleting 73  
description 72  
printing 72  
storing 72  
Quick Copy Jobs Menu 206  
Quick Sets 66  
R
RAM  
disk problems 116  
disk settings 221  
space 200  
268 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
resellers, HP authorized 160  
Reset Memory setting 223  
Resets Menu 223  
resetting the printer 223  
resolution  
parts information on CD 160  
See also customer support  
worldwide country/region offices 172  
Service Information form 166  
setting  
dpi capabilities 16  
FastRes 16  
levels of gray 16  
ProRes 16  
binding edge 211  
carriage return /line feed (CR/LF) option  
216  
cleaning page to run automatically 218  
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) Courier font 216  
setting 217  
custom paper option 213  
resolution setting 217  
Resource Manager. See HP Resource  
Manager  
resource saving 232  
Restore Factory Settings 223  
restoring default settings 223  
resuming printing 30  
REt setting 217  
custom paper sizes 63  
default number of copies 213  
default paper size 213  
dimensions of short and long edges of  
custom paper 214  
draft quality printing through 300-dpi  
resolution 217  
duplex option 211  
returning  
envelope type 210  
equipment 165  
fuser mode 212  
toner cartridges in U.S. 245  
toner cartridges outside the U.S. 246  
RIP ONCE 65  
manual feed 211  
number of characters on line for A4 paper  
216  
rollers, replacing 93  
rough paper  
printing 45  
number of lines on page 214  
PCL font number 215  
PCL font pitch 215  
setting fuser mode for 212  
running the manual cleaning page 91  
PCL font point size 215  
PCL fonts 214  
PCL symbol set 215  
portrait or landscape orientation 214  
response to toner low 87  
response to toner lower 87  
small paper speed 212  
tray 1 mode 210  
tray 1 option 69  
tray 1 size 210  
tray 1 to cassette 210  
tray 1 type 211  
tray 2 type 211  
S
safety statements  
laser products 248  
laser products in Finland 249  
saving  
internal printer resources 232  
paper 244  
power 219, 244  
printer settings 66  
quick jobs 72  
settings at control panel 30  
toner 218, 244  
tray 3 type 211  
tray 4 type 211  
units of measure 214  
setting up printer 13  
settings  
affecting printer messages 111  
at control panel override printer driver and  
software commands 205  
auto continue 220  
changing control panel 32  
changing printer 40  
changing printer driver 36  
changing with embedded web server 251  
clearable warnings 220  
configuring 253  
scaling page images 66  
securing information on configuration page  
153  
security page (embedded web server) 254  
Select key 30  
serial cables, troubleshooting 139  
serial cards, ordering 22  
serial number  
learning from configuration page 153  
serial number for printer  
location 20  
service  
agreements 160  
HP SupportPacks 161  
control panel 205  
EN  
Index 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
cycling through and selecting at control Solaris  
panel 30  
installing printer software 41  
envelope size 210  
input/output communication 222  
jam recovery 220  
maintenance message 220  
number of quick copy jobs 221  
used with HP Web JetAdmin 41  
space requirements 200  
spare parts after production has stopped  
246  
special paper  
printer driver versus software program 32 manually feeding 71  
printer personality (language) 221  
protocol 225  
ordering 21  
specifications  
PS error page 221  
RAM disk 221  
saving at control panel 30  
saving printer 66  
toner low and toner out 219  
verifying current 151  
viewing control panel 32  
shaking toner cartridges 86  
shelf life of toner cartridges 85  
shiping equipment 165  
SIMMs, compatibility with printer 229  
sizes 189  
acoustic emissions 202  
card stock 198  
electrical 201  
envelope feeder 197  
envelopes 197  
environmental 201  
general 202  
heavy paper 198  
humidity 202  
labels 196  
memory 202  
paper 188  
printing by 70  
printer 200  
scaling pages 66  
transparencies 196  
setting default image size for paper 213 specks on page problem 130  
setting for envelopes 210 speed  
setting for short and long edges of custom printer 16  
paper 214  
printing 217  
setting for tray 1 210  
setting for small paper 212  
slower than expected 140  
transmitting data 222  
spots on page problem 136  
standby power consumption 201  
supported for paper in duplexer 191  
supported for paper in envelope feeder  
191  
supported for paper in tray 1 189  
supported for paper in trays 2, 3, 4 190 static electricity when installing memory  
skewed page problem 134  
slides. See transparencies  
slow print speed problem 140  
slow printing, setting 212  
small paper  
230  
stored jobs  
deleting 207  
printing 207  
storing  
printing 45, 53  
envelopes 198  
setting speed 212  
smearing on paper problem 132  
soft fonts 156  
soft fonts, setting 214  
soft gloss paper, ordering 22  
software  
print jobs 78  
toner cartridges 85  
straight-through paper path 45  
Sun Solaris  
installing printer software 41  
used with HP Web JetAdmin 41  
supplies  
for Windows 36  
help for printer drivers 37  
included on printer CD 33  
license 170  
Macintosh 40  
network 33, 41  
after production has stopped 246  
direct ordering 160  
level of consumption 253  
list and illustration 21  
obtaining information with embedded web  
server 251  
utilities 158  
software CD  
ordering 22  
for printer 33  
ordering 22  
printing status page 154  
recycling in U.S. 245  
270 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
recycling outside U.S. 246  
usage report 154  
website 245  
installing 14  
life expectancy 85  
location 20  
supplies page (embedded web server) 253 material safety data sheet (MSDS) 246  
supplies status page  
ordering 22  
description 155  
location in control panel menus 209  
printing 154  
printing report on usage 154  
recycling 245  
shaking 86  
Support Assistant 160  
support. See customer support  
SupportPacks 161, 246  
SuSE Linux 41  
shelf life 85  
storing 85  
supplies information available with  
genuine HP 84  
switching printer languages 37, 221  
symbol set for PCL 215  
warranty 169  
Toner Density setting 218  
Symphony, entering escape characters in toner low  
237  
configuring alerts 94  
symptoms of output quality problems 128  
configuring response 87  
description 87  
toner low setting 219  
toner out  
configuring alerts 94  
configuring response 87  
description 87  
toner out setting 219  
top cover  
clearing paper jams under 98  
location 19  
top output bin  
clearing paper jams 106  
location 19  
tracks on page problem 136  
transfer rollers, replacing 93  
transmitting data, speed 222  
transparencies  
fuser mode for 212  
ordering 22  
T
TCP/IP protocol, setting 226  
TCP/IP setting 225  
technical support. See customer support  
temperature  
maximum printer 193  
operating 202  
testing the paper path 209  
throughput of printer 16  
thumbnails, using to browse in online user  
guide 11  
timeouts  
for held jobs 221  
for input/output 222  
tire tracks on page problem 136  
Token Ring cards, configuring 226  
toner  
checking level 85  
cleaning from clothing 89, 98  
density 218  
fuser mode for best possible fusing 212  
HP UltraPrecise 16  
loose problem 133  
non-HP detected 116  
redistributing in cartridge 86  
remaining in printer after paper jam 97  
saving 244  
printing 44, 62  
solving repeated jams 110  
specifications 196  
tray 1  
capacity 189  
cassette vs. first mode 69  
clearing paper jams 102  
customizing operation 69  
description 46  
envelope specifications 197  
feeding paper  
setting for manual 211  
load message 118  
loading 46  
smear problem 132  
troubleshooting 192  
toner cartridges  
authenticating 84  
checking toner level 85  
clearing paper jams 98  
configuring toner low and toner out  
settings 219  
disadvantages of non-HP 84  
features 16  
location 19  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
orienting special paper 54  
printing envelopes 55  
setting how printer will use (mode) 210  
setting size 210  
hotline to report fraud 161  
EN  
Index 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
setting size from control panel 70  
setting type 211  
summary of techniques 95  
using information pages 151  
supported paper sizes and weights 189 TrueType fonts 37  
tray 2  
two-up printing 67  
adjusting for paper 47  
bad connection message 112  
clearing paper jams 102  
description 47  
load message 118  
loading 47  
type settings, printing by 70  
U
UltraPrecise toner 16  
unauthorized access, preventing 40  
understanding tray order 68  
units of measure, setting 214  
UNIX printer installer 41  
upgrading memory 229  
usage page  
printing from control panel 208  
viewing from embedded web server 253  
usage reporting 154  
USB cards, ordering 22  
user guide  
browsing with thumbnails 11  
finding information 10  
finding words 11  
magnifying page view 10  
navigating 9  
location 19  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
orienting special paper 54  
setting size from control panel 70  
setting type 211  
supported paper sizes and weights 190  
tray 3  
adjusting for paper 47  
bad connection message 112  
clearing paper jams 102  
description 47  
load message 118  
loading 47  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
orienting special paper 54  
setting size from control panel 70  
setting type 211  
supported paper sizes and weights 190  
tray 4  
adjusting for paper 47  
bad connection message 112  
clearing paper jams 102  
description 47  
online help 14  
paging through 11  
printing 11  
using online 9  
utilities for software 158  
V
-Value+ key 30  
VCCI statement for Japan 248  
vector graphics 235  
verifying  
accessories installation 152  
current settings 151  
memory installation 232  
vertical spacing, setting on page 214  
vertical white lines problem 135  
viewing  
load message 118  
loading 47  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
orienting special paper 54  
setting size from control panel 70  
setting type 211  
supported paper sizes and weights 190  
trays  
clearing jams 102  
online user guide 10  
PDF (portable document format) files 10  
location 19  
obtaining configuration information with  
embedded web browser 251  
ordering 22  
W
troubleshooting  
warnings setting 220  
control panel messages 111  
flowchart 137  
warranty  
extended 246  
HP Fast Infrared Receiver 148  
HP JetDirect print server communication  
150  
hardware maintenance 246  
information 165  
printer 167  
output quality problems 128  
paper jams 96  
toner cartridge 169  
watermarks  
print quality problems 192  
repeated paper jams 110  
orienting paper for duplexing 51  
printing 66  
272 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
wavy paper problem 135  
Web JetAdmin. See HP Web JetAdmin  
web server. See embedded web server  
websites  
Adobe Acrobat Reader 12  
HP JetSend 38  
HP Planet Partners program 245  
HP Support Packs 161  
HP Web JetAdmin 41  
linking with embedded web server 254  
material safety data sheet (MSDS) 246  
parts identification and pricing 160  
printer software 157  
supplies 245  
supported host systems 41  
weight  
envelopes in envelope feeder 191  
paper 189  
paper equivalences 194  
paper in duplexer 191  
paper in tray 1 189  
paper in trays 2, 3, 4 190  
printer 201  
white lines problem 135  
white spots on black problem 136  
wide A4 setting 216  
Windows. See Microsoft Windows  
Word Perfect for DOS, entering escape  
characters in 237  
worldwide country/region sales and service  
offices 172  
wrinkled paper problem 135  
wrong printer selected for Macintosh 144  
wrong tray used for printing 142  
X
x dimension (short edge) of custom paper  
214  
Y
y dimension (long edge) of paper 214  
Z
zone, assigning on the network 40  
zooming in and out of pages 10  
ZoomSmart 66  
EN  
Index 273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
274 Index  
EN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
copyright © 2002  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
http://www.hp.com/support/lj4100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Car Seat PD250304A User Manual
Grundig Flat Panel Television 46 VLE 8160 WL User Manual
Haier Washer GWT700AW User Manual
Hasbro Games 09336 User Manual
Honeywell Thermostat 69 2072 05 User Manual
HTC Cell Phone RAPH500 User Manual
Hypertec Carrying Case 3101 User Manual
iHome Clock Radio ihome User Manual
Impex Home Gym IVK 402 User Manual
Impex Home Gym MWB CR 4 User Manual